CXD3048R [SONY]
CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo + Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost; CD数字信号处理器,内置数字伺服+防震内存控制器+数字高和低音增强型号: | CXD3048R |
厂家: | SONY CORPORATION |
描述: | CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo + Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost |
文件: | 总205页 (文件大小:1481K) |
中文: | 中文翻译 | 下载: | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
CXD3048R
CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo +
Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost
Description
The CXD3048R is a digital signal processor LSI for CD
players. This LSI incorporates a digital servo, high & bass
boost, shock-proof memory controller, 1-bit DAC and
analog low-pass filter.
120 pin LQFP (Plastic)
Features
• All digital signal processing during playback is
performed with a single chip
• Highly integrated mounting possible due to a built-in RAM
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Block
• Supports CAV (Constant Angular Velocity) playback
• Frame jitter free
• 0.5× to 4× speed continuous playback possible
• Allows relative rotational velocity readout
• Wide capture range playback mode
• Spindle rotational velocity following method
• Supports 1× to 4× speed playback
• Supports variable pitch playback
• The bit clock, which strobes the EFM signal, is
generated by the digital PLL.
Digital Filter, DAC and Analog Low-pass Filter Blocks
• Digital dynamic bass boost and high boost
Bass Boost: 4th-order IIR 24dB/Oct
+10dB/+14dB/+18dB/+22dB
High Boost: Second-order IIR 12dB/Oct
+4dB/+6dB/+8dB/+10dB
• Independent turnover frequency selection possible
Bass Boost: 125Hz/160Hz/200Hz
• EFM data demodulation
• Enhanced EFM frame sync signal protection
• Refined super strategy-based powerful error correction
C1: double correction, C2: quadruple correction
Supported during 4× speed playback
• Noise reduction during track jumps
• Auto zero-cross mute
• Subcode demodulation and subcode-Q data error
detection
• Digital spindle servo
High Boost: 5kHz/7kHz
• Digital dynamics (compressor)
Volume increased by +5dB at low level
• 8× oversampling digital filter
(attenuation: 61dB, ripple within band: ±0.0075dB)
• Digital signal output possible after boost
• Serial data format selectable from (output) 20 bits/
18 bits/16 bits (rearward truncation, MSB first)
• Digital attenuation: – ∞, –60 to +6dB, 2048 steps (linear)
• Soft mute
• 16-bit traverse counter
• Asymmetry correction circuit
• CPU interface on serial bus
• Digital de-emphasis
• High-cut filter
• Error correction monitor signal, etc. output from a new
CPU interface
• Servo auto sequencer
Applications
CD players
• Fine search performs track jumps with high accuracy
• Digital audio interface outputs
• Digital level meter, peak meter
Structure
Silicon gate CMOS IC
• Bilingual compatible
• VCO control mode
• CD TEXT data demodulation
• Digital Out can be generated from the audio serial
input. (also supported after shock-proof and digital
bass boost processing, subcode-Q addition function)
Absolute Maximum Ratings
• Supply voltage VDD, AVDD
• Input voltage VI
• Output voltage VO
• Storage temperature Tstg
• Supply voltage difference
AVSS – VSS
Vss – 0.5 to +3.5
Vss – 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
Vss – 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
–55 to +150
V
V
V
°C
–0.3 to +0.3
V
Digital Servo (DSSP) Block
AVDD – VDD
AVDD – VDD
–0.3 to +0.3V (AVDD < 1.7V)
–0.3 to +1.0V (AVDD = 1.7 to 2.7V)
• Microcomputer software-based flexible servo control
• Offset cancel function for servo error signal
• Auto gain control function for servo loop
• E:F balance, focus bias adjustment functions
• Surf jump function supporting micro two-axis
• Tracking filter: 6 stages
Recommended Operating Conditions
• Supply voltage
VDD, AVDD0, 3, XVDD
AVDD1, 2, DVDD
• Operating temperature Topr
1.7 to 2.7
VDD to 2.7
–20 to +75
V
V
°C
Focus filter: 5 stages
Shock-proof Memory Controller Block
• Supports an external 4M-bit/16M-bit DRAM
• Time axis-based data linking
• ADPCM compression method (uncompressed/4 bits/
6 bits/8 bits)
I/O Pin Capacitance
• Input capacitance
• Output capacitance
CI
CO
7 (max.)
7 (max.)
VDD = VI = 0V
fM = 1MHz
pF
pF
Note) Measurement conditions
Sony reserves the right to change products and specifications without prior notice. This information does not convey any license by
any implication or otherwise under any patents or other right. Application circuits shown, if any, are typical examples illustrating the
operation of the devices. Sony cannot assume responsibility for any problems arising out of the use of these circuits.
– 1 –
E02653A37
CXD3048R
Block Diagram
TES1
TEST
XRST
Clock
Error
Generator
Corrector
LRCK
BCK
Selector
EFM
demodulator
D/A
Interface
RFAC
ASYI
ASYO
BIAS
PCMD
Asymmetry
Corrector
Digital
OUT
DOUT
32K
RAM
XPCK
FILO
FILI
A0 to A11
D0 to D3
Sub Code
Processor
Digital
PLL
XEMP
XWIH
XQOK
XRAS
XWE
PCO
CLTV
Shock-proof
Memory
Controller +
Compression/
Expansion
MDP
Digital
CLV
PWMI
XCAS
XWRE
XRDE
XSOE
SENS
DATA
XLAT
CPU
Interface
SYSM
LRMU
LRCKI
BCKI
CLOK
SCOR
SBSO
EXCK
SQSO
SQCK
Servo
Auto
Sequencer
DAC
PCMDI
HPL
Signal
Processor
Block
HPR
Memory Controller,
Bass Boost Block
AOUT1
VREFL
LPF
AOUT2
VREFR
LPF
Servo Block
SCLK
COUT
SSTP
ATSK
SERVO
Interface
MIRR
DFCT
FOK
MIRR
DFCT
FOK
RFDC
CE
SERVO DSP
PWM GENERATOR
TE
FFDR
FRDR
TFDR
TRDR
SFDR
SRDR
FOCUS PWM
GENERATOR
OPAmp
Analog SW Converter
A/D
SE
FOCUS SERVO
FE
TRACKING PWM
GENERATOR
TRACKING
SERVO
VC
IGEN
SLED PWM
GENERATOR
SLED SERVO
– 2 –
CXD3048R
Pin Configuration
90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
91
92
60
SE
FE
VSS1
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
TEST
93
VC
TES1
94
VSS2
FRDR
FFDR
TRDR
TFDR
SRDR
SFDR
SSTP
MDS
MDP
C176
VDD2
LRCK
LRCKI
PCMD
PCMDI
BCK
AVDD2
AOUT2
VREFR
AVSS2
AVSS1
VREFL
AOUT1
AVDD1
XVSS
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
XTAO
47 XTAI
46 XVDD
45 HVDD
44 HPR
43 HPL
42 HVSS
41 XTSL
40 EXCK
39 SBSO
38 XWIH
37 XEMP
36 SQSO
35 SCLK
34 SQCK
33 VSS0
32 R4M
31 XWRE
BCKI
DVDD
A3
A2
A1
A0
A10
A11
TEST3
TEST4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
– 3 –
CXD3048R
Pin Description
Power Pin
supply No.
Symbol I/O Value
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XRAS
XWE
D1
1, 0 DRAM row address strobe signal.
O
O
1, 0 DRAM data input enable signal.
1, 0 DRAM data bus 1.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
D0
1, 0 DRAM data bus 0.
D3
1, 0 DRAM data bus 3.
D2
1, 0 DRAM data bus 2.
TEST1
TEST2
XCAS
Test pin. Do not connect.
Test pin. Do not connect.
O
9
1, 0 DRAM column address strobe signal.
1, 0 WFCK output. XOE is output by switching with the command.
1, 0 DRAM address 9.
O
DRAM
I/F
10 WFCK
11 A9
O
O
12 A8
1, 0 DRAM address 8.
O
13 A7
1, 0 DRAM address 7.
O
14 DVSS
15 A6
—
DRAM interface GND.
—
O
1, 0 DRAM address 6.
1, 0 DRAM address 5.
1, 0 DRAM address 4.
16 A5
O
17 A4
O
DRAM readout enable signal input. XRDE monitor is output by switching
with the command.
18 XRDE
19 VDD0
20 CLOK
21 DATA
22 SENS
1, 0
—
I/O
—
I
Digital power supply.
Serial data transfer clock input from CPU. SQSO and SENS readout
clocks are output by switching with the command.
Serial data input from CPU.
I
SENS output to CPU. SQSO data is output by switching with the
command.
1, Z, 0
O
Latch input from CPU. The serial data is latched at the falling edge. XLAT
which is low for 6µs or more is enabled.
23 XLAT
I
24 XSOE
25 SYSM
Clock input mode switching from CPU. Valid when $A4 ENXSOE = 1.
Mute input. Muted when high.
I
I
Digital
Word clock output f = 2Fs. GRSCOR is output by switching with the
command.
26 WDCK
27 SCOR
1, 0
1, 0
O
O
High output when the subcode sync is detected. SCOR, which is
interpolated in the IC, is output by switching with the command.
28 XRST
29 PWMI
System reset. Reset when low.
I
I
Spindle motor external control input.
Subcode Q OK input. XQOK monitor is output by switching with the
command.
30 XQOK
31 XWRE
1, 0
1, 0
I/O
I/O
DRAM write enable signal input. XWRE monitor is output by switching
with the command.
– 4 –
CXD3048R
Power Pin
supply No.
Symbol I/O Value
Description
Microcomputer clock output. R8M and C4M are output by switching with
the command.
32 R4M
1, 0
—
O
33 Vss0
34 SQCK
35 SCLK
Digital GND.
—
SQSO readout clock input.
SENS serial data readout clock input.
I
I
Subcode Q 80-bit and PCM peak and level data output. CD TEXT data
output.
36 SQSO
1, 0
O
Digital
37 XEMP
38 XWIH
39 SBSO
40 EXCK
1, 0 DRAM readout prohibited signal.
1, 0 Write to DRAM prohibited signal.
1, 0 Subcode P to W serial output.
SBSO readout clock input.
O
O
O
I
Crystal selection input. Low when the crystal is 16.9344MHz; high when
the crystal is 33.8688MHz.
41 XTSL
I
42 HVSS
43 HPL
44 HPR
45 HVDD
46 XVDD
—
Headphone GND.
—
O
1, 0 Lch headphone PDM output.
1, 0 Rch headphone PDM output.
H/P
O
—
Headphone power supply.
Master clock power supply.
—
Crystal oscillation circuit input. The master clock is externally input from
this pin.
47 XTAI
I
X'tal
48 XTAO
49 XVSS
Crystal oscillation circuit output.
Master clock GND.
O
50 AVDD1
51 AOUT1
52 VREFL
53 AVSS1
54 AVSS2
55 VREFR
56 AOUT2
57 AVDD2
58 TES1
59 TEST
60 VSS1
—
Analog power supply.
—
O
O
—
—
O
O
—
I
Analog Lch analog output.
Lch
Analog Lch reference voltage.
—
—
Analog GND.
Analog GND.
Analog Rch reference voltage.
Analog Rch analog output.
Rch
—
Analog power supply.
Test pin. Normally GND.
Test pin. Normally GND.
Digital GND.
I
—
—
OR signal output of Lch, Rch "0" detection flag (AND output) and SYSM.
Only "0" detection flag is output by switching with the command.
61 LRMU
1, 0
O
Digital
62 DOUT
63 ATSK
64 DFCT
65 FOK
1, 0 Digital Out output.
O
1, 0 Anti-shock input/output.
1, 0 Defect signal input/output.
1, 0 Focus OK signal input/output.
I/O
I/O
I/O
– 5 –
CXD3048R
Power Pin
supply No.
Symbol I/O Value
Description
Mirror signal input/output.
66 MIRR
1, 0
1, 0
I/O
I/O
Track number count signal input/output. SCOR is output by switching with
the command.
67 COUT
C2PO output. MNT3 and GTOP are output by switching with the
command.
68 C2PO
69 GFS
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
O
O
O
Digital
GFS output. MNT2 and XROF are output by switching with the command.
XUGF output. MNT0, RFCK, C4M and QRCVD are output by switching
with the command.
70 XUGF
XPCK output. MNT1, FSTO and GTOP are output by switching with the
command.
71 XPCK
1, 0
O
Digital power supply.
72 VDD1
73 PCO
74 FILI
—
—
O
I
Master PLL charge pump output.
Master PLL filter input.
1, Z, 0
Master PLL (slave = digital PLL) filter output.
Multiplier VCO1 control voltage input.
Wide-band EFM PLL VCO2 control voltage input.
Wide-band EFM PLL charge pump output.
Analog GND.
75 FILO
76 CLTV
77 VCTL
78 VPCO
79 AVSS3
80 ASYO
81 ASYI
82 BIAS
83 AVDD3
84 RFAC
85 AVDD0
86 IGEN
87 AVSS0
88 RFDC
89 CE
Analog
O
I
I
1, Z, 0
—
O
—
O
I
ASYM
EFM full-swing output (low = Vss, high = VDD).
Asymmetry comparator voltage input.
Asymmetry circuit constant current input.
Analog power supply.
1, 0
I
—
—
—
—
I
EFM signal input.
Analog power supply.
—
I
Operational amplifier constant current input.
Analog GND.
—
I
RF signal input.
Center servo analog input or E input.
Tracking error signal input or F input.
Sled error signal input or B input.
Focus error signal input or A input.
Center voltage input.
I
A/D
90 TE
I
91 SE
I
92 FE
I
93 VC
I
Digital GND.
94 VSS2
95 FRDR
96 FFDR
97 TRDR
98 TFDR
99 SRDR
100 SFDR
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
Focus drive output.
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
Focus drive output.
Digital
Tracking drive output.
Tracking drive output.
Sled drive output.
Sled drive output.
– 6 –
CXD3048R
Power Pin
supply No.
Symbol I/O Value
Description
Disc innermost detection signal input.
101 SSTP
102 MDS
I
Spindle drive output.
1, Z, 0
1, Z, 0
O
O
Spindle motor servo control output.
103 MDP
104 C176
Digital
176.4kHz output. 88.2kHz for quasi-double speed setting.
Low output when XRST = low.
1, 0
O
Digital power supply.
105 VDD2
106 LRCK
107 LRCKI
108 PCMD
109 PCMDI
110 BCK
111 BCKI
112 DVDD
113 A3
—
—
O
I
D/A interface. LR clock output f = Fs.
D/A interface. LR clock input.
D/A interface. Serial data output. (two's complement, MSB first)
D/A interface. Serial data input. (two's complement, MSB first)
D/A interface. Bit clock output.
D/A interface. Bit clock input.
DRAM interface power supply.
DRAM address 3.
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
O
I
O
I
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
DRAM
I/F
DRAM address 2.
114 A2
DRAM address 1.
115 A1
DRAM address 0.
116 A0
DRAM address 10.
117 A10
DRAM address 11. Write prohibition factor is input by switching with the
command.
118 A11
1, 0
I/O
Test pin. Do not connect.
Test pin. Do not connect.
119 TEST3
120 TEST4
O
O
Notes) • PCMD is a MSB first, two's complement output.
• GTOP is used to monitor the frame sync protection status. (High: sync protection window released.)
• XUGF is the frame sync obtained from the EFM signal, and is negative pulse. It is the signal before
sync protection.
• XPCK is the inverse of the EFM PLL clock. The PLL is designed so that the falling edge and the
EFM signal transition point coincide.
• The GFS signal goes high when the frame sync and the insertion protection timing match.
• RFCK is derived from the crystal accuracy, and has a cycle of 136µs.
• C2PO represents the data error status.
• XROF is generated when the 32K RAM exceeds the ±28 frame jitter margin.
• C4M is a 4.2336MHz output that changes in CAV-W mode and variable pitch mode.
• R8M is the 8.4672MHz output.
• FSTO is the 2/3 frequency-division output of the XTAI pin.
• SOUT is the serial data output inside the servo block.
• SOCK is the serial data readout clock output inside the servo block.
• XOLT is the serial data latch output inside the servo block.
– 7 –
CXD3048R
Monitor Pin Output Combinations
Command bit
Output data
MONSEL SRO1 MTSL1 MTSL0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
XUGF
MNT0
RFCK
C4M
XPCK
MNT1
XPCK
FSTO
SOCK
GTOP
GFS
C2PO
MNT3
GTOP
C2PO
C2PO
C2PO
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
SCOR
MIRR
MIRR
MIRR
MIRR
MIRR
—
MNT2
XROF
GFS
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
SOUT
QRCVD
XOLT
GFS
—
—
—
—: don't care
– 8 –
CXD3048R
Electrical Characteristics
1. DC Characteristics (VDD1 = 2.5 ± 0.2V, VDD2 (logic) = 1.8 ± 0.1V, DVSS = VSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Applicable
pins
Typ. Max. Unit
Item
Conditions
Min.
1.7
VIH
VIL
Vt+
Vt–
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Input voltage
(1)
13, 15
V
0.7
1.7
Input voltage
(2)
0.7
V
14
Schmitt input
Vt+ –
Vt–
Hysteresis
0.4
VOH
VOL
IOH = –4mA
IOL = 4mA
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
2.0
Output
voltage
12, 13
V
0.4
VIN = VSS or
VDD
15
13
II (1)
II (2)
µA
µA
–10
–10
10
10
Input leak current (1)
Input leak current (2)
VIN = VSS or
VDD
(VDD = AVDD = 2.5 ± 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Applicable
Typ. Max. Unit
Item
Conditions
Min.
pins
Input voltage
(1)
VIH (1)
VIL (1)
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
1.7
1, 2,
V
3,
6,
4
0.7
Input voltage
(2)
V
7
VIN (2) Analog input
Vt+
Input voltage
VSS
1.7
VDD
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Input voltage
(3)
Vt–
0.7
V
5
Schmitt input
Vt+ –
Vt–
Hysteresis
0.4
VOH (1) IOH = –4mA
VOL (1) IOL = 4mA
VOH (2) IOH = –2mA
VOL (2) IOL = 2mA
VOH (3) IOH = –0.28mA
VOL (3) IOL = 0.36mA
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
2.0
2.0
2, 8,
Output
voltage (1)
V
10, 15
0.4
Output
voltage (2)
9
V
0.4
VDD – 0.5
0
VDD
Output
voltage (3)
11
V
0.4
1, 3,
VIN = VSS or
Input leak current (1)
Input leak current (2)
Input leak current (3)
II (1)
VDD
µA
µA
µA
µA
–10
–10
–40
–10
10
10
40
10
5,
6
VIN = VSS or
2,
4
II (2)
VDD
VIN = 0.25VDD
II (3)
7
to 0.75VDD
Tri-state output leak current
(when high impedance)
VO = VSS or
VDD
10
IOZ
– 9 –
CXD3048R
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Applicable
Typ.
Max. Unit
Item
Conditions
Min.
pins
Input voltage
(1)
VIH (1)
VIL (1)
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
0.65VDD
1, 2,
V
3,
6,
4
0.35VDD
Input voltage
(2)
V
7
VIN (2) Analog input
Vt+
Input voltage
VSS
VDD
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
0.65VDD
Input voltage
(3)
Vt–
0.35VDD
V
5
Schmitt input
Vt+ –
Vt–
Hysteresis
0.4
VOH (1) IOH = –2.4mA
VOL (1) IOL = 2.4mA
VOH (2) IOH = –1.4mA
VOL (2) IOL = 1.4mA
VOH (3) IOH = –0.28mA
VOL (3) IOL = 0.36mA
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
VDD – 0.4
VDD
V
2, 8,
Output
voltage (1)
10, 16
0
0.4
VDD – 0.4
VDD
V
0.4
Output
voltage (2)
9
0
VDD – 0.5
0
VDD
V
0.4
Output
voltage (3)
11
1, 3,
VIN = VSS or
Input leak current (1)
Input leak current (2)
Input leak current (3)
II (1)
VDD
µA
µA
µA
µA
–10
–10
–40
–10
10
10
40
10
5,
6
VIN = VSS or
2,
4
II (2)
VDD
VIN = 0.25VDD
II (3)
7
to 0.75VDD
Tri-state output leak current
(when high impedance)
VO = VSS or
VDD
10
IOZ
Applicable pins
1
TEST, TES1
2
COUT, MIRR, DFCT, FOK, XQOK, XWRE, ATSK
SYSM, DATA, XSOE, XTSL
3
4
5
6
7
8
SSTP, PWMI
SQCK, EXCK, XRST, CLOK, SCLK, XLAT
VCTL, FILI, CLTV, ASYI, IGEN, BIAS
RFDC, CE, TE, SE, FE, VC
XEMP, XWIH, SQSO, SBSO, XUGF, XPCK, GFS, C2PO, SCOR, WDCK, SFDR, SRDR, TFDR, TRDR,
FFDR, FRDR, ASYO, DOUT, C176
9
R4M
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SENS, MDP, VPCO, PCO, MDS
FILO
A0 to A10, XRAS, XCAS, XWE, WFCK, LRCK, BCK, PCMD
D0 to D3, XRDE, A11
LRCKI, BCKI
PCMDI
HPL, HPR
– 10 –
CXD3048R
2. AC Characteristics
(1) XTAI pin
(a) When using self-excited oscillation
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
fMAX
Min.
7
Typ.
Max.
34
Unit
Oscillation
frequency
MHz
(b) When inputting pulses to XTAI pin
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min.
13
Typ.
Max.
500
Unit
ns
High level pulse
width
t
t
t
WHX
WLX
CX
Low level pulse
width
13
26
500
ns
ns
V
Pulse cycle
1000
Input high level
Input low level
0.7VDD
VIHX
VILX
0.2VDD
10
V
Rise time,
fall time
ns
t
R, t
F
t
CX
t
WLX
tWHX
V
IHX
V
IHX × 0.9
XTAI
V
DD/2
V
IHX × 0.1
V
ILX
t
R
tF
Note) When the pulse is input to the XTAI pin, be sure to input it via the capacitor.
– 11 –
CXD3048R
(2) CLOK, DATA, XLAT, SQCK and EXCK pins
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Clock frequency
Symbol
fCK
Min.
Typ.
Max.
0.65
Unit
MHz
ns
t
t
t
t
t
WCK
SU
H
Clock pulse width
750
300
300
300
750
30000
Setup time
ns
Hold time
ns
D
Delay time
30000
0.65
65
ns
WL
Latch pulse width
ns
fT
EXCK SQCK frequency
EXCK SQCK pulse width
COUT frequency (during input)
COUT pulse width (during input)
MHz
ns
t
WT
750
7.5
fT
kHz
µs
t
WT
Only when $44 and $45 are executed.
1/fCK
WCK
t
tWCK
CLOK
DATA
XLAT
tWSC
tH
t
SU
t
D
tWL
EXCK
SQCK
COUT
t
WT
tWT
1/fT
SBSO
SQSO
t
SU
tH
(3) R4M pin (when $A4X CKOUTSL2 = CKOUTSL1 = 0)
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Output frequency
Output duty
Symbol
fOUT
Min.
Typ.
4.2336
50
Max.
Unit
MHz
%
DOUT
VOUT
Output amplitude
VDD
V
– 12 –
CXD3048R
(4) SCLK pin
XLAT
SCLK
t
DLS
tSPW
. . .
. . .
1/fSCLK
Serial Read Out Data
(SENS)
MSB
LSB
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Item
SCLK frequency
SCLK pulse width
Delay time
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
16
Unit
MHz
ns
fSCLK
t
SPW
DLS
31.3
15
t
µs
(5) COUT, MIRR and DFCT pins
Operating frequency
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
fCOUT
Min.
40
Typ.
Max.
Unit Conditions
COUT maximum
operating frequency
1
kHz
MIRR maximum
operating frequency
2
fMIRR
40
5
kHz
DFCT maximum
operating frequency
3
fDFCTH
kHz
1
When using a high-speed traverse TZC.
2
B
A
When the RF signal continuously satisfies the following conditions during the above traverse.
• A = 0.11VDD to 0.23VDD
B
A + B
•
≤ 25%
3
During complete RF signal omission.
When settings related to DFCT signal generation are Typ.
– 13 –
CXD3048R
1-bit DAC and LPF Block Analog Characteristics
(VDD = AVDD = 2.6V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = +25°C)
Item
Symbol
THD
Conditions
Crystal
384Fs
768Fs
Min.
Typ.
Max.
0.016
0.016
Unit
%
0.009
0.009
Total harmonic
distortion
1kHz sine wave, 0dB data,
20kHz LPF
1kHz sine wave, 0dB data,
AMUT OFF (Using A-weighting
filter 20kHz LPF)
384Fs
768Fs
92
92
94
94
Signal-to-noise
ratio
S/N
dB
Fs = 44.1kHz in all cases.
The total harmonic distortion and signal-to-noise ratio measurement circuits are shown below.
22µF
100Ω
AOUT1 (2)
VREFL (R)
Audio Analyzer
100kΩ
2200pF
1µF
LPF external circuit diagram ($A560C400 PDMSEL = 1)
768Fs/384Fs
Rch
Lch
A
B
DATA
RF
Audio Analyzer
TEST DISC
CXD3048R
Block diagram of analog characteristics measurement
(VDD = AVDD = 2.6V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = +25°C)
Item
Symbol
Min.
640
10
Typ.
658
Max.
Unit
mVrms
kΩ
Applicable pins
1
VOUT
Output voltage
1
2
RL
Load resistance
CVREF
VREF pin capacitance
1
µF
Measurement is conducted for the above circuit diagrams with the sine wave output of 1kHz and 0dB.
Applicable pins
1
AOUT1, AOUT2
2
VREFL, VREFR
– 14 –
CXD3048R
Contents
[1] CPU Interface
§1-1. CPU Interface Timing...................................................................................................................... 16
§1-2. CPU Interface Command Table ...................................................................................................... 16
§1-3. CPU Command Presets ................................................................................................................. 32
§1-4. Description of SENS Signals .......................................................................................................... 43
§1-5. Description of Commands .............................................................................................................. 45
[2] Subcode Interface
§2-1. P to W Subcode Readout ............................................................................................................. 101
§2-2. 80-bit Subcode-Q Readout ........................................................................................................... 101
[3] Description of Modes
§3-1. CLV-N Mode .................................................................................................................................. 108
§3-2. CLV-W Mode ................................................................................................................................. 108
§3-3. CAV-W Mode................................................................................................................................. 108
§3-4. VCO-C Mode ................................................................................................................................ 109
[4] Description of Other Functions
§4-1. Channel Clock Recovery by Digital PLL Circuit ........................................................................... 112
§4-2. Frame Sync Protection ................................................................................................................. 114
§4-3. Error Correction ............................................................................................................................ 114
§4-4. DA Interface .................................................................................................................................. 115
§4-5. Digital Out ..................................................................................................................................... 118
§4-6. Servo Auto Sequence ................................................................................................................... 124
§4-7. Digital CLV .................................................................................................................................... 132
§4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed ................................................................................................... 133
§4-9. Description of DAC Block and Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Circuits ............................ 133
§4-10. DAC Block Input Timing ................................................................................................................ 134
§4-11. Description of DAC Block Functions............................................................................................. 135
§4-12. LPF Block...................................................................................................................................... 140
§4-13. Description of Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Functions.................................................. 141
§4-14. CPU to DRAM Access Function ................................................................................................... 146
§4-15. Asymmetry Correction .................................................................................................................. 150
§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation....................................................................................................... 151
[5] Description of Servo Signal Processing System Functions and Commands
§5-1. General Description of Servo Signal Processing System ............................................................ 153
§5-2. Digital Servo Block Master Clock (MCK)...................................................................................... 154
§5-3. DC Offset Cancel [AVRG Measurement and Compensation] ...................................................... 155
§5-4. E:F Balance Adjustment Function ................................................................................................ 156
§5-5. FCS Bias Adjustment Function..................................................................................................... 156
§5-6. AGCNTL Function......................................................................................................................... 158
§5-7. FCS Servo and FCS Search ........................................................................................................ 160
§5-8. TRK and SLD Servo Control ........................................................................................................ 161
§5-9. MIRR and DFCT Signal Generation ............................................................................................. 162
§5-10. DFCT Countermeasure Circuit ..................................................................................................... 163
§5-11. Anti-shock Circuit .......................................................................................................................... 163
§5-12. Brake Circuit ................................................................................................................................. 164
§5-13. COUT Signal................................................................................................................................. 165
§5-14. Serial Readout Circuit................................................................................................................... 165
§5-15. Writing to Coefficient RAM ........................................................................................................... 166
§5-16. PWM Output ................................................................................................................................. 166
§5-17. Servo Status Changes Produced by LOCK Signal ...................................................................... 167
§5-18. Description of Commands and Data Sets .................................................................................... 167
§5-19. List of Servo Filter Coefficients..................................................................................................... 195
§5-20. Filter Composition ......................................................................................................................... 197
§5-21. TRACKING and FOCUS Frequency Response ........................................................................... 203
[6] Application Circuit.................................................................................................................................. 204
Explanation of abbreviations
AVRG: Average
AGCNTL: Auto gain control
FCS: Focus
TRK: Tracking
SLD: Sled
DFCT: Defect
– 15 –
CXD3048R
[1] CPU Interface
§1-1. CPU Interface Timing
• CPU interface
This interface uses DATA, CLOK and XLAT to set the modes.
The interface timing chart is shown below. (See 2. AC Characteristics in Electrical Characteristics, for the
details of the AC characteristics.)
750ns to 30µs
CLOK
D0
D1
D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23
DATA
750ns or more
(6µs or more
when $AAX
MLAT ON)
XLAT
Valid
Registers
• The internal registers are initialized by a reset when XRST = 0.
§1-2. CPU Interface Command Table
Total bit length for each register
Register
Total bit length
8 bits
0 to 2
3
8 to 24 bits
16 bits
4 to 6
7
8
20 bits
32 bits
9
32 bits
A
B
C
D
E
32 bits
28 bits
28 bits
28 bits
20 bits
– 16 –
Command Table ($0X to 1X)
Address
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Command
ter
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
—
D7
—
D6
D5
D4
—
D3
—
D2
D1
D0
—
FOCUS SERVO ON
(FOCUS GAIN
NORMAL)
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FOCUS SERVO ON
(FOCUS GAIN
DOWN)
1
0
0
1
—
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FOCUS SERVO OFF,
0V OUT
FOCUS
0
0 0 0 0
—
—
CONTROL
FOCUS SERVO OFF,
FOCUS SEARCH
VOLTAGE OUT
1
FOCUS SEARCH
VOLTAGE DOWN
0
0
—
—
0
1
1
0
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FOCUS SEARCH
VOLTAGE UP
ANTI SHOCK ON
ANTI SHOCK OFF
BRAKE ON
1
—
—
—
—
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
0
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
BRAKE OFF
0
TRACKING
CONTROL
1
0 0 0 1
TRACKING GAIN
NORMAL
—
—
—
—
TRACKING GAIN UP
1
TRACKING GAIN UP
FILTER SELECT 1
—
—
TRACKING GAIN UP
FILTER SELECT 2
0
—: don't care
Command Table ($2X to 3X)
Address
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Command
ter
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
—
D7
—
D6
D5
—
D4
—
D3
—
D2
D1
—
D0
—
TRACKING SERVO
OFF
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
—
0
—
—
—
—
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TRACKING SERVO
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FORWARD TRACK
JUMP
1
0
REVERSE TRACK
JUMP
1
1
TRACKING
CONTROL
2
0 0 1 0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SLED SERVO OFF
SLED SERVO ON
0
1
FORWARD SLED
MOVE
1
0
REVERSE SLED
MOVE
1
1
Address
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
—
D7
—
D6
—
D5
—
D4
—
D3
—
D2
—
D1
—
D0
—
SLED KICK LEVEL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(±1 × basic value) (default)
SLED KICK LEVEL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(±2 × basic value)
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
SLED KICK LEVEL
(±3 × basic value)
SLED KICK LEVEL
(±4 × basic value)
—: don't care
Command Table ($340X)
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3
Address 4
Data 1
D6 D5
Data 2
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
D4
D3
D0
KRAM DATA (K00)
SLED INPUT GAIN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KRAM DATA (K01)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K02)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K03)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K04)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K05)
SLED OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K06)
FOCUS INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K07)
SLED AUTO GAIN
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
KRAM DATA (K08)
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K09)
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K0A)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K0B)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K0C)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K0D)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K0E)
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K0F)
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN
Command Table ($341X)
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3
Address 4
Data 1
D6 D5
Data 2
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
D4
D3
D0
KRAM DATA (K10)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K11)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K12)
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K13)
FOCUS AUTO GAIN
KRAM DATA (K14)
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN HIGH PASS FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K15)
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN HIGH PASS FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K16)
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K17)
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN LOW PASS FILTER B
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1
KRAM DATA (K18)
FIX
KRAM DATA (K19)
TRACKING INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K1A)
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K1B)
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K1C)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K1D)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K1E)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K1F)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
Command Table ($342X)
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3
Address 4
Data 1
D6 D5
Data 2
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
D4
D3
D0
KRAM DATA (K20)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K21)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K22)
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K23)
TRACKING AUTO GAIN
KRAM DATA (K24)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K25)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K26)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K27)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
KRAM DATA (K28)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K29)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K2A)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K2B)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN
KRAM DATA (K2C)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K2D)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K2E)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K2F)
Not used
Command Table ($343X)
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3
Address 4
Data 1
D6 D5
Data 2
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
D4
D3
D0
KRAM DATA (K30)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
SLED INPUT GAIN (when TGup2 is accessed with SFSK = 1)
KRAM DATA (K31)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K32)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K33)
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K34)
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K35)
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN
KRAM DATA (K36)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K37)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
KRAM DATA (K38)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K39)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K3A)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K3B)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K3C)
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K3D)
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K3E)
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K3F)
Not used
Command Table ($344X)
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3
Address 4
Data 1
D6 D5
Data 2
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
D4
D3
D0
KRAM DATA (K40)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K41)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K42)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K43)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K44)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K45)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K46)
TRACKING HOLD INPUT GAIN (when TGup2 is accessed with THSK = 1)
KRAM DATA (K47)
Not used
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
KRAM DATA (K48)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K49)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K4A)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K4B)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K4C)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K4D)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K4E)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K4F)
Not used
Command Table ($348X to 3FX)
Address 1 Address 2
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
PGFS PGFS PFOK PFOK
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Address 3
Regis-
ter
Command
D8
D7
0
D6
D5
0
D4
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
MRS MRT1 MRT0
PGFS, PFOK, RFAC
DOUT
1
0
1
0
A/D COPY EMPH CAT DOUT DOUT DOUT WIN DOUT
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEL EN
D
b8
EN1 DMUT WOD EN EN2
SFBK SFBK
LB1 LB2 LB2
0
0
0
0
Booster Surf Brake
Booster
1
2
SN
SN SM
THB FHB TLB1 FLB1 TLB2
ON ON ON ON ON
HBST HBST LB1S LB1S LB2S LB2S
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
IDF IDF IDF IDF
DF IDFT IDFT
LPDF INV
0
0
0
DFCT
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
SL3 SL2 SL1 SL0
SLS
1
0
0
RFDC
Address 3
Data 1
Data 3
D2 D1
Data 2
D6 D5
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
D7
D4
D3
D0
—
1
0
0
0
1
0
FBL9 FBL8 FBL7 FBL6 FBL5 FBL4 FBL3 FBL2 FBL1
FB9 FB8 FB7 FB6 FB5 FB4 FB3 FB2 FB1
FCS Bias Limit
FCS Bias Data
1
1
1
1
—
TV9 TV8 TV7 TV6 TV5 TV4 TV3 TV2 TV1 TV0 Traverse Center Data
—: don't care
Command Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
Address 1
Address 2
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
D6 D5
Data 4
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
D7
D4
D3
D0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
FT1 FT0 FS5 FS4 FS3 FS2 FS1 FS0 FTZ FG6 FG5 FG4 FG3 FG2 FG1 FG0 FCS search, AGF
TDZC DTZC TJ5 TJ4 TJ3 TJ2 TJ1 TJ0 SFJP TG6 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 TG1 TG0 TRK jump, AGT
FZSH FZSL SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 AGS AGJ AGGF AGGT AGV1 AGV2 AGHS AGHT FZC, AGC, SLD move
VCLM VCLC FLM FLC0 RFLM RFLC AGF AGT DFSW LKSW TBLM TCLM FLC1 TLC2 TLC1 TLC0 DC measure, cancel
DAC SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0
FIF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Serial data readout
FCS Bias, Gain,
Surf jump / brake
0
1
1
1
FBONFBSS FBUP FBV1 FBV0
TJD0 FPS1 FPS0 TPS1 TPS0 SVDA SJHD INBK MTI0
ZC
FPG FPG TPG TPG
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Gain
S1
0
S0
0
S1
0
S0
0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
1
0
1
0
UD
FOCUS
FZC
1
1
1
1
0
SRQ1 SRQ0
ASYO
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
SFO2 SFO1 SDF2 SDF1 MAX2 MAX1 SFOX BTF D2V2 D2V1 D1V2 D1V1 RINT
0
0
0
Mirr, DFCT, FOK
TZC, COUT, Bottom,
MIRR
COSSCOTS CETZ CETF COT2 COT1 MOT2
0
BTS1 BTS0 MRC1 MRC0
0
0
SFID SFSK THID THSK ABEF TLD2 TLD1 TLD0 SDF6 SDF5 SDF4 SDF3
SLD filter
F1NM F1DM F3NM F3DM T1NM T1UM T3NM T3UM DFIS TLCD
0
LKIN COIN MDFI MIRI XT1D Filter
0
AGG4 XT4D XT2D
0
DRR2DRR1 DRR0
0
ASFG FTQ
1
SRO1
0
AGHF ASOT Clock, others
Command Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20
D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
D7
FI
D6
D5
D4
FI
D3
FI
D2
D1
D0
FI
FI
FI
FI
FI
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0
FFS
System GAIN
FZB3 FZB2 FZB1 FZB0 FZA3 FZA2 FZA1 FZA0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
1
1
1
1
FSUD
0
1
0
0
FFS5 FFS4 FFS3 FFS2 FFS1 FFS0 FOCUS
UP
Command Table ($4X to EX)
Address
D2 D1
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Regis-
Command
ter
D3
D0
0
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
—
D2
D1
—
D0
—
4
5
Auto sequence
0
0
1
1
0
0
AS3
AS2
TR2
AS1
AS0
MT3
MT2
0
MT1
MT0
LSSL
0
0
—
—
Blind (A, E),
Brake (B),
1
0
1
TR3
SD3
TR1
SD1
TR0
SD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
8
—
—
2
—
—
1
Overflow (C, G)
Sled KICK,
BRAKE (D),
KICK (F)
6
7
0
0
1
1
1
1
SD2
KF3
2048
KF2
KF1
512
KF0
256
0
—
4
Auto sequence (N)
track jump
32768 16384 8192 4096
1024
128
64
32
16
count setting
MODE
CD- DOUT DOUT
WSEL
VCO
VCO
VCO1
CS0
8
9
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
ASHS SOCT0
KSL3 KSL2 KSL1 KSL0
0
1
0
0
0
1
specification
ROM Mute Mute-F
SEL2
SEL1
Function
DSPB ASEQ
BiliGL BiliGL
MAIN SUB
1
1
FLFC
0
0
0
0
0
0
specification
ON-OFF ON-OFF
—: don't care
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Command
ter
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
0
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
Audio CTRL
Signal select
0
1
Mute
ATT
PCT1 PCT2
RSL1 RSL0
SOC2
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
DTSL1 DTSL0 MCSL1 MCSL0
0
AD7
1
SDSL2 SDSL1 SDSL0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
ZMUTA SMUT AD10 AD9
DAC HiCut
AD8
AD6
AD5
AD4
BST
PDM
SEL
PWDN ZDPL WOC
OBIT1 OBIT0
EMPH FILTER CL
0
1
0
1
Bass boost
BBST BBST
Vdwn1 Vdwn0
BBON1 BBON0 HBON1 HBON0 BBSL1 BBSL0 HBSL1 HBSL0
COMP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AD7
1
0
1
AD5
1
0
AD4
0
ON
1
SMUT AD10 AD9
DAC HiCut
AD8
AD6
BST
PDM
SEL
A
1
0
1
0
PWDN ZDPL XWOC
EMPH FILTER CL
0
1
1
0
Headphone
BBST BBST
Vdwn1 Vdwn0
BBON1 BBON0 HBON1 HBON0 BBSL1 BBSL0 HBSL1 HBSL0
COMP
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
ON
SL
SL
GTOP NOLIM SPSL
XOE
OUT
Shock-proof
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
READ2 REFSEL REFON
SDTO
MSL2 MSL1 MSL0
memory setting
XQOK XWRE CHECK WDCK COM
Shock-proof
XQOK XWRE XRDE XSOEO XSOEO2 ADDRST
0
OUT
memory control
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
SubQA3 SubQA2 SubQA1 SubQA0
0
1
0
0
0
SubQD7 SubQD6 SubQD5 SubQD4
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
DRWR DRADR
0
DRD15 DRD14 DRD13 DRD12
DRAM I/F
DADR19 DADR18 DADR17 DADR16 DADR15 DADR14 DADR13 DADR12
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
D2 D1
Data 1
Data 2
D2 D1
ADPON BITSL1 BITSL0
Data 3
Data 4
Regis-
ter
Command
D3
D0
D3
1
D2
D1
1
D0
0
D3
D0
0
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
Compression
setting
ADP
WO
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
GRSEL
EFM playability
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
ARDTEN
AVW
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
enhancement setting
Sync expansion
specification
SFP5 SFP4 SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0
A
1
0
1
0
DSP DSSP ASYM ESP
LPF DSUB ASEQ
HCAV ERCNT
SLEEP SLEEP
Sleep setting
ADCPS
PCOL
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP
Variable pitch
setting
VARI VARI WTC SCSY SENS SENS SENS SENS
ON USE C2PO (sub) SEL3 SEL2 SEL1 SEL0
Spindle servo
setting
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 MDP
MDP
MDS
CTL
MDP
0
MDP
LPWR2
32
0
EA
EA
EA
EA OUTSL1 OUTSL0
UP
CTL4
Traverse monitor
counter setting
B
C
D
E
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
32768 16384 8192 4096
Gain Gain Gain Gain
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
16
8
4
2
1
Spindle servo
Gain
Gain
PCC1 PCC0 SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0 SRP3 SRP2 SPR1 SRP0
coefficient setting
MDP1 MDP0 MDS1 MDS0 DCLV1 DCLV0
Gain
VP
VP
CLV CTRL
SPD mode
0
TB
TP
VP7
VP6
VP5
VP4
VP3
VP2
VP1
VP0
0
0
0
CLVS
CTL1 CTL0
Gain
Gain
INV
CM3
CM2
CM1
CM0 EPWM SPDC ICAP SFSL VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON
CAV1 CAV0
VPCO
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Data 5
D2 D1
SCSY SOCT1 TXON TXOUT OUTL1 OUTL0
Data 6
Data 7
Regis-
Command
Data 3
Data 4
Address
Data 1
Data 2
ter
D3
D0
D3
D2 D1
D0
D3
0
D2
D1
D0
0
MODE
SCOR
SEL
8
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
ERC4
0
0
OUTL2
specification
Function
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DIV4
0
0
specification
0 0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
AUDIO CTRL
Signal select
EN CKOUT CKOUT SLD
max
max
max
max
max
max
max
max
0 1 0 0
XSOE
SL2
SL1
BBIN C2PO7 C2PO6 C2PO5 C2PO4 C2PO3 C2PO2 C2PO1 C2PO0
0 0 1
0 1
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
0
setup
0
0
0
0
1
0
Bass boost
0 1 0 1
BBST BBST BBST BBST
1 0
Vup1
Vup0
Uth
Lth
PDM
INV
1 1
0
0
0
0
A
1 0 1 0
0 0 1
0 1
AD3
0
AD2
1
AD1
0
AD0
0
Headphone
0 1 1 0
BBST BBST BBST BBST
1 0
Vup1
Vup0
Uth
Lth
PDM
INV
1 1
0
0
0
0
ADDRST
SEL
STA
SEL
XWI
H2
XWI SPSL WQR
H1 COM MON
A11
SEL
READ READ MON
S2 S1 SEL
Shock-proof
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
ADRMO
0
memory setting
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
0 0 0 0
SubQD3 SubQD2 SubQD1 SubQD0
—: don't care
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Data 5
D2 D1
Data 6
D2 D1
Data 7
D2 D1
Regis-
Command
Address
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
ter
D3
D0
D3
D0
D3
D0
DRD11 DRD10 DRD9 DRD8 DRD7 DRD6 DRD5 DRD4 DRD3 DRD2 DRD1 DRD0
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
DRAM I/F
DADR11 DADR10 DADR9 DADR8 DADR7 DADR6 DADR5 DADR4 DADR3 DADR2 DADR1 DADR0
ADPCM ADPCM
Compression
setting
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
0
ORMU
0
0
0
0
SE
L
MUTE
1 0 1 0
A
EFM playability
enhancement
setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Sync expansion
specification
REF
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
OV3
OV2
OV1
OV0
SLIM1 SLIM0 OV4
MDP MDP MDP
SEL2
Spindle servo
setting
MDP
CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0
Traverse monitor
counter setting
B
C
D
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
0
0
MTSL1 MTSL0 ASYE MD2
0
0
Spindle servo
EDC7 EDC6 EDC5 EDC4 EDC3 EDC2 EDC1 EDC0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—: don't care
§1-3. CPU Command Presets
Command Preset Table ($0X to 34X)
Address
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
—
D7
—
D6
D5
—
D4
—
D3
—
D2
D1
—
D0
—
FOCUS
FOCUS SERVO OFF,
0V OUT
0
1
2
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CONTROL
TRACKING
CONTROL
TRACKING GAIN UP
FILTER SELECT 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TRACKING
MODE
TRACKING SERVO OFF
SLED SERVO OFF
Address
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Regis-
ter
Command
SELECT
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
—
D7
—
D6
—
D5
—
D4
—
D3
—
D2
—
D1
—
D0
—
SLED KICK LEVEL
0 0 1 1
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(±1 × basic value) (default)
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Data 1
Data 2
3
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
KRAM DATA
0
1
0
0
0
See "Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table"
0 0 1 1
($3400XX to $344FXX)
—: don't care
Command Preset Table ($348X to 34FX)
Address 1 Address 2
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Address 3
Command
ter
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
0
D6
D5
0
D4
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGFS, PFOK, RFAC
DOUT
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Booster Surf Brake
Booster
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
DFCT
Address 3
Data 1
Data 3
Data 2
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
D7
0
D6
D5
D4
0
D3
0
D2
D1
D0
—
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FCS Bias Limit
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
FCS Bias Data
Traverse Center Data
—: don't care
Command Preset Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
Address 1
Address 2
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
0
D6
D5
1
D4
0
D3
1
D0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FCS search, AGF
TRK jump, AGT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FZC, AGC, SLD move
DC measure, cancel
Serial data read out
FCS Bias, Gain,
Surf jump / brake
Gain
1
0
1
0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
FOCUS
ASYO
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
MIRR, DFCT, FOK
TZC, COUT, Bottom,
MIRR
SLD filter
Filter
Clock, others
Command Preset Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
D2 D1
Regis-
ter
Command
D23 to D20
D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9
D8
0
D7
0
D6
D5
0
D4
0
D3
0
D0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
System GAIN
FOCUS
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX)
Address
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Command
ter
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
—
D2
D1
—
D0
—
4
5
Auto sequence
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
—
—
Blind (A, E),
Brake (B),
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
0
—
—
0
—
—
0
Overflow (C, G)
Sled KICK,
BRAKE (D),
KICK (F)
6
7
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
Auto sequence (N)
track jump count
setting
8
9
MODE setting
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Function
specification
—: dun't care
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Command
ter
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
0
D2
D1
1
D0
1
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
Audio CTRL
Signal select
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Bass boost
A
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
Headphone
Shock-proof
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
memory setting
Shock-proof
memory control
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
DRAM I/F
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Regis-
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Command
ter
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
1
D2
D1
1
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
Compression
setting
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
EFM playability
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
enhancement setting
Sync expansion
specification
A
1
0
1
0
Sleep setting
Variable pitch
setting
Spindle servo
setting
Traverse monitor
counter setting
B
C
D
E
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
SPD mode
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Regis-
Command
Data 3
Data 4
Address
Data 1
Data 2
ter
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
MODE
8
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
specification
Function
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
0
—
0
0
—
0
specification
0 0
—
0
AUDIO CTRL
Signal select
0 1 0 0
0 0 1
0 1
0 1 0 1
Bass boost
1 0
A
1 0 1 0
1 1
0
0 0 1
0 1
0 1 1 0
Headphone
1 0
1 1
0
Shock-proof
0 1 1 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
memory setting
—: don't care
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Regis-
Command
Data 3
0 0 0 0
Data 4
Address
Data 1
Data 2
ter
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
0
0
0
0
1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DRAM I/F
Compression
setting
A
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
EFM playability
enhancement
setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Sync expansion
specification
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Spindle servo
setting
Traverse monitor
counter setting
B
C
D
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
Spindle servo
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
—: don't care
CXD3048R
(Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table (1))
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K00
K01
K02
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
K08
K09
K0A
K0B
K0C
K0D
K0E
K0F
E0
81
23
7F
6A
10
14
30
7F
46
81
1C
7F
58
82
7F
SLED INPUT GAIN
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
SLED OUTPUT GAIN
FOCUS INPUT GAIN
SLED AUTO GAIN
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
K17
K18
K19
K1A
K1B
K1C
K1D
K1E
K1F
4E
32
20
30
80
77
80
77
00
F1
7F
3B
81
44
7F
5E
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN
FOCUS AUTO GAIN
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER B
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain LOW PASS FILTER B
Fix
TRACKING INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
K20
K21
K22
K23
K24
K25
K26
K27
K28
K29
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2F
82
44
18
30
7F
46
81
3A
7F
66
82
44
4E
1B
00
00
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING AUTO GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
Fix indicates that normal preset values should be used.
– 41 –
CXD3048R
<Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table (2)>
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K30
K31
K32
K33
K34
K35
K36
K37
K38
K39
K3A
K3B
K3C
K3D
K3E
K3F
80
66
00
7F
6E
20
7F
3B
80
44
7F
77
86
0D
57
00
SLED INPUT GAIN (Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with SFSK = 1.)
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B
Not used
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
K40
K41
K42
K43
K44
K45
K46
04
7F
7F
79
17
6D
00
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
(Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with THSK = 1.)
Not used
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L
K47
K48
K49
K4A
K4B
K4C
K4D
K4E
K4F
00
02
7F
7F
79
17
54
00
00
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
– 42 –
CXD3048R
§1-4. Description of SENS Signals
SENS output
Microcomputer
serial register
ASEQ = 0
ASEQ = 1
Output data length
(latching not required)
$0X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
FZC
AS
—
—
—
—
—
—
$1X
$2X
TZC
$30 to $37
$38
SSTP
AGOK
XAVEBSY
$38
See §5-18. Description of Commands and Data
Sets "$39".
$39X
Z
8 to 16 bits
$3A
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
FBIAS Count STOP
—
—
—
—
—
$3B to $3F
$4X
SSTP
XBUSY
FOK
0
$5X
$6X
$A0 to $A8
$AA to $AF
GFS
GFS
—
$BX
COMP
COUT
OV64
Z
COMP
COUT
OV64
0
—
—
—
—
$CX
$EX
$7X, 8X, 9X, DX, FX
$38 outputs AGOK during AGT and AGF command settings, and XAVEBSY during AVRG measurement.
SSTP is output in all other cases.
– 43 –
CXD3048R
Description of SENS Signals
SENS output
Z
The SENS pin is high impedance.
XBUSY
Low while the auto sequencer is in operation, high when operation terminates.
Outputs the same signal as the FOK pin.
High for "focus OK".
FOK
GFS
High when the regenerated frame sync is obtained with the correct timing.
Counts the number of tracks set with Reg.B.
COMP
High when Reg.B is latched, low when COUT is counted for the initial Reg.B number.
Counts the number of tracks set with Reg.B.
High when Reg.B is latched, toggles each time COUT is counted for the Reg.B number.
While $44 and $45 are being executed, toggles with each COUT 8-count instead of the
Reg.B number.
COUT
OV64
Low when the EFM signal is lengthened by 64 channel clock pulses or more after passing
through the sync detection filter.
– 44 –
CXD3048R
§1-5. Description of Commands
The meaning of the data for each address on the XLAT pin side is explained below.
$4X commands
Register name
4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
MAX timer value
MT2 MT1
Timer range
AS3
AS2
AS1
AS0
MT3
MT0 LSSL
0
0
0
Command
AS3
AS2
0
AS1
0
AS0
0
Cancel
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Fine Search
Focus-On
1
0
RXF
1
1
1
1 Track Jump
10 Track Jump
2N Track Jump
M Track Move
0
0
RXF
RXF
RXF
RXF
0
1
1
0
1
1
RXF = 0 Forward
RXF = 1 Reverse
• When the Focus-on command ($47) is canceled, $02 is sent and the auto sequence is interrupted.
• When the Track jump commands ($44, $45 and $48 to $4D) are canceled, $25 is sent and the auto sequence
is interrupted.
MAX timer value
Timer range
MT3
23.2ms
1.49s
MT2
11.6ms
0.74s
MT1
5.8ms
0.37s
MT0
2.9ms
0.18s
LSSL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
• To disable the MAX timer, set the MAX timer value to "0".
$5X commands
Timer
Blind (A, E), Overflow (C, G)
Brake (B)
TR3
TR2
TR1
TR0
0.18ms
0.36ms
0.09ms
0.18ms
0.045ms
0.09ms
0.022ms
0.045ms
– 45 –
CXD3048R
$6X commands
Register name
Data 1
Data 2
KICK (D)
KICK (F)
6
SD3
Timer
SD2
SD1
SD0
KF3
KF2
KF1
KF0
SD3
SD2
SD1
5.8ms
2.9ms
SD0
When executing KICK (D) $44 or $45
When executing KICK (D) $4C or $4D
23.2ms
11.6ms
11.6ms
5.8ms
2.9ms
1.45ms
Timer
KF3
KF2
KF1
KF0
0.72ms
0.36ms
0.18ms
0.09ms
KICK (F)
$7X commands
Auto sequence track jump count setting
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Auto sequence track
jump count setting
• This command is used to set N when a 2N-track jump is executed, to set M when an M-track move is
executed and to set the jump count when fine search is executed for auto sequencer.
• The maximum track count is 65,535, but note that with a 2N-track jump the maximum track jump count
depends on the mechanical limitations of the optical system.
• When the track jump count is from 0 to 15, the COUT signal is counted for 2N-track jumps and M-track
moves; when the count is 16 or over, the MIRR signal is counted. For fine search, the COUT signal is
counted.
– 46 –
CXD3048R
$8X commands
Data 1
D2 D1
CD- DOUT DOUT
Data 2
D2 D1
Command
MODE
D3
D0
D3
D0
VCO
SEL2
VCO
SEL1
WSEL
ASHS SOCT0
specification ROM Mute Mute-F
Command bit C2PO timing
Processing
CDROM mode; average value interpolation and pre-value hold are not
performed.
CDROM = 1
CDROM = 0
1-3
1-3
Audio mode; average value interpolation and pre-value hold are performed.
Command bit
Processing
DOUT Mute = 1 When Digital Out is on ($B MD2 = 1), DOUT output is muted.
DOUT Mute = 0 When Digital Out is on, DOUT output is not muted.
Command bit
Processing
DOUT Mute F = 1 When Digital Out is on ($B MD2 = 1), DA output is muted.
DOUT Mute F = 0 DA output mute is not affected when Digital Out is either on or off.
MD2 Other mute conditions
DOUT Mute DOUT Mute F DOUT output
DA output for 48-bit slot
0dB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
OFF
– ∞dB
0dB
– ∞dB
0dB
0dB
– ∞dB
– ∞dB
See "Mute conditions" (1) to (5) under $AX commands for other mute conditions.
When $A4 DTSL1 = 1, the Digital Out from the bass boost or shock-proof is selected. See the description
of Digital Out.
– 47 –
CXD3048R
Command bit
WSEL = 1
WSEL = 0
Sync protection window width
±26 channel clock
Application
Anti-rolling is enhanced.
±6 channel clock
Sync window protection is enhanced.
In normal-speed playback, channel clock = 4.3218MHz.
Command bit
Function
ASHS = 0
ASHS = 1
The command transfer rate from the auto sequencer to the DSSP block is set to normal speed.
The command transfer rate from the auto sequencer to the DSSP block is set to half speed.
See "§4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed" for settings.
Command bit
Processing
Subcode-Q is output from the SQSO pin.
SOCT0
0
SOCT1
0
The spindle speed measurement result is output from the SQSO pin. Input the
readout clock to SQCK. (See Timing Chart 2-5.)
0
1
1
1
0
1
Various signals are output from the SQSO pin. Input the readout clock to SQCK.
(See Timing Chart 2-4.)
The error rate is output from the SQSO pin. Input the readout clock to SQCK.
(See Timing Chart 2-6.)
$8X command TXOUT = 0 and $A8X command SDTO OUT = 0 must be set.
Data 2
D2 D1
Data 3
D2 D1
Command
D0
D3
D0
D3
MODE
specification
VCO
SEL2
VCO
SEL1
ASHS SOCT0
KSL3 KSL2 KSL1 KSL0
See above.
Command bit
VCOSEL2 = 0
VCOSEL2 = 1
Processing
Multiplier PLL VCO2 is set to normal speed.
Multiplier PLL VCO2 is set to approximately twice the normal speed.
Command bit
Processing
KSL3
KSL2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/1 frequency-divided.
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/2 frequency-divided.
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/4 frequency-divided.
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/8 frequency-divided.
– 48 –
CXD3048R
Command bit
VCOSEL1 = 0
VCOSEL1 = 1
Processing
Wide-band PLL VCO1 is set to normal speed.
Wide-band PLL VCO1 is set to approximately twice the normal speed.
Command bit
Processing
KSL1
KSL0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/1 frequency-divided.
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/2 frequency-divided.
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/4 frequency-divided.
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/8 frequency-divided.
Block Diagram of VCO Internal Path
VCO1SEL
1/1
1/2
No.1 VCO1
No.2 VCO1
To DSP interior
1/4
1/8
VCO1CS0
KSL3, 2
VCO1 internal path
1/1
1/2
VCO2SEL
VCO2
To DSP interior
1/4
1/8
KSL1, 0
VCO2 internal path
– 49 –
CXD3048R
$8X commands cont.
Data 4
Data 5
D2 D1
Data 6
D2 D1
Command
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
D0
D3
D0
MODE
0
VCO1
CS0
SCOR
SEL
ERC4
SCSY SOCT1 TXON TXOUT OUTL1 OUTL0
See page 48.
specification
Command bit
VCO1CS0 = 0
VCO1CS0 = 1
Processing
Selects the No. 1 VCO1.
Selects the No. 2 VCO1.
The CXD3048R has two multiplier PLL VCO1s, and this command selects one of these VCO1s.
The two VCOs are No. 2 and No. 1 in order of the maximum frequency.
The block diagrams for VCO1 and VCO2 including VCOSEL1, VCOSEL2, KSL0 to KSL3 and VCO1CS0
shown on the previous page.
Command bit
ERC4 = 0
Processing
C2 error double correction is performed when DSPB = 1.
C2 error quadruple correction is performed even when DSPB = 1.
ERC4 = 1
Command bit
SCOR SEL = 0
SCOR SEL = 1
Processing
WDCK signal is output.
GRSCOR (protected SCOR) is output.
Used when outputting GRSCOR from the WDCK pin.
Command bit
Processing
SCSY = 0
SCSY = 1
No processing.
GRSCOR (protected SCOR) synchronization is applied again.
Used to resynchronize GRSCOR.
The rising edge signal of this command bit is used internally, so when resynchronizing GRSCOR, first return
the setting to "0" and then set to "1".
GRSCOR is the crystal accuracy SCOR signal obtained by removing the motor wow component.
This signal is synchronized with PCMDATA.
The resynchronization conditions are when GTOP = high.
Command bit
TXON = 0
Processing
When CD TEXT data is not demodulated, set TXON to "0".
When CD TEXT data is demodulated, set TXON to "1".
TXON = 1
See "§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation".
– 50 –
CXD3048R
Command bit
TXOUT = 0
TXOUT = 1
Processing
Various signals except for CD TEXT are output from the SQSO pin.
CD TEXT data is output from the SQSO pin.
See "§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation".
Command bit
Processing
OUTL1 = 0
OUTL1 = 1
WDCK and XPCK are output.
WDCK and XPCK outputs are set low.
Command bit
OUTL0 = 0
OUTL0 = 1
Processing
PCMD, BCK and LRCK are output.
PCMD, BCK and LRCK outputs are set low.
Data 7
Command
D3
0
D2
0
D1
D0
0
MODE
specification
OUTL2
Command bit
OUTL2 = 0
OUTL2 = 1
Processing
WFCK is output.
WFCK is set low.
The $A7X command XOE OUT must be set to "0".
– 51 –
CXD3048R
$9X commands
Data 1
D2 D1
Data 2
Command
D3
1
D0
1
D3
BiliGL BiliGL
MAIN SUB
D2
D1
D0
0
Function
specification
DSPB ASEQ
ON-OFFON-OFF
FLFC
Command bit
DSPB = 0
Processing
Normal-speed playback, C2 error quadruple correction.
Double-speed playback, C2 error double correction. (quadruple correction when ERC4 = 1)
DSPB = 1
Normally FLFC = 0.
In CAV-W mode, set FLFC to "1" independently of the playback speed.
Command bit
BiliGL SUB = 0
BiliGL SUB = 1
BiliGL MAIN = 0
STEREO
SUB
BiliGL MAIN = 1
MAIN
Mute
Definition of bilingual capable MAIN, SUB and STEREO
The left channel input is output to the left and right channels for MAIN.
The right channel input is output to the left and right channels for SUB.
The left and right channel inputs are output to the left and right channels, respectively, for STEREO.
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Command
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
D3
1
D2
D1
0
D0
1
D3
0
D2
D1
0
D0
0
Function
specification
0
0
0
Data 6
Data 7
D3
0
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
DIV4
This switches the digital PLL master clock.
Either the conventional mode or the 2/3 mode (2/3 of the conventional clock) can be selected.
Command bit
DIV4 = 0
Processing
Digital PLL master clock; conventional mode. (preset)
Digital PLL master clock; 2/3 mode.
DIV4 = 1
Note) Do not set DIV4 to "1" when DSPB = 0.
– 52 –
CXD3048R
$AX commands
Data 1
Data 2
Command
D3
0
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
Audio CTRL
0
Mute
ATT PCT1 PCT2
SOC2
Command bit
Mute = 0
Meaning
Command bit
ATT = 0
Meaning
Attenuation off.
–12dB
Mute off if other mute
conditions are not set.
ATT = 1
Mute on. Peak register
reset.
Mute = 1
Mute conditions
(1) When register A mute = 1.
(2) When register 8 DOUT Mute F = 1 and Digital Out is on ($B command MD2 = 1).
(3) When GFS stays low for over 35ms (during normal-speed).
(4) When register 9 BiliGL MAIN = Sub = 1.
(5) When register A PCT1 = 1 and PCT2 = 0.
(1) to (3) perform zero-cross muting with a 1ms time limit.
Command bit
ECC error correction ability
Meaning
Normal mode
PCM Gain
PCT1
PCT2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
× 0dB
× 0dB
Mute
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: double
Level meter mode
Peak meter mode
Normal mode
× 0dB
Description of level meter mode (see Timing Chart 1-4.)
• When the LSI is set to this mode, it performs digital level meter functions.
• When the 96-bit clock is input to SQCK, 96 bits of data are output to SQSO.
The initial 80 bits are subcode-Q data (see "[2] Subcode Interface"). The last 16 bits are LSB first, which are
15-bit PCM data (absolute values) and an L/R flag.
The final bit (L/R flag) is high when the 15-bit PCM data is from the left channel and low when the data is
from the right channel.
• The PCM data is reset and the L/R flag is inverted after one readout.
Then the measurement for the maximum value continues until the next readout.
– 53 –
CXD3048R
Description of peak meter mode (see Timing Chart 1-5.)
• When the LSI is set to this mode, the maximum PCM data value is detected regardless of if it comes from
the left or right channel.
The 96-bit clock must be input to SQCK to read out this data.
• When the 96-bit clock is input, 96 bits of data are output to SQSO and the value is set in the LSI internal
register again.
In other words, the PCM maximum value register is not reset by the readout.
• To reset the PCM maximum value register to "0", set PCT1 = PCT2 = 0 or set the $AX command Mute.
• The subcode-Q absolute time is automatically controlled in this mode.
In other words, after the maximum value is generated, the absolute time for CRC to become OK is retained in
the memory. Normal operation is conducted for the relative time.
• The final bit (L/R flag) of the 96-bit data is normally "0".
• The pre-value hold and average value interpolation data are fixed to level (– ∞) for this mode.
Command bit
SOC2 = 0
Processing
The SENS signal is output from the SENS pin as usual.
The SQSO pin signal is output from the SENS pin.
SOC2 = 1
SENS output switching
• This command is used to output the SQSO pin signal from the SENS pin.
When SOC2 = 0, SENS output is performed as usual.
When SOC2 = 1, the SQSO pin signal is output from the SENS pin.
At this time, the readout clock is input to the SCLK pin.
Note) Perform the SOC2 switching when SQCK = SCLK = high.
Data 6
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
Audio CTRL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
– 54 –
CXD3048R
$A4 commands (preset: $A4C800)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
DTSLDTSLMCSL MCSL
A4
SDSL SDSL SDSL
0
0
1
0
0
RSL1RSL0
0
0
(Signal select)
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
Data 7
D3 D2 D1 D0
Data 5
Data 6
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
max
max
max
max
EN CKOUT CKOUT SLD max
max
max
max
C2PO3 C2PO2 C2PO1 C2PO0
XSOE SL2 SL1 BBIN C2PO7 C2PO6 C2PO5 C2PO4
RSL1, RSL0:
These bits set the external buffer RAM.
RSL1
RSL0
Processing
The external buffer RAM is set to 4M bits.
No selected.
0
1
1
0
0
1
The external buffer RAM is set to 16M bits.
: preset
DTSL1, DTSL0: See the second half of the description of $A4 commands.
MCSL1:
This bit sets the DAC block master clock.
When "0", the DAC block master clock is set to 16.9344MHz (384fs). (default)
When "1", the DAC block master clock is set to 33.8688MHz (768fs).
This bit sets the shock-proof memory controller block master clock.
When "0", the shock-proof memory controller block master clock is set to 16.9344MHz (384fs).
(default)
MCSL0:
When "1", the shock-proof memory controller block master clock is set to 33.8688MHz (768fs).
This bit switches the command input method.
ENXSOE:
When "0", the command transfer clock and the SENS serial data readout clock are input
from the respective pins. (default)
When "1", the command transfer clock and the SENS serial data readout clock are input
from the CLOK pin.
The clock input is switched with the XSOE pin. At this time, connect the SCLK pin to high.
ENXSOE XSOE pin
CLOK pin
SCLK pin
SENS serial data readout
clock input
0
0
L
Command transfer clock input
SENS serial data readout
clock input
H
Command transfer clock input
SENS serial data readout
clock input
1
1
L
Connect to high.
H
Command transfer clock input Connect to high.
In addition, when ENXSOE is set to "1" and the SQSO pin signal output is read from the
SENS pin, the command input method is as follows.
At this time, connect the SCLK and SQCK pins to high.
See the command descriptions for $A command SOC2 and $8 commands TXOUT, SOCT0
and SOCT1.
– 55 –
CXD3048R
$A8 $8
SDTO TX SOC SOC
OUT OUT T0
$8
$8
ENXS XSOE $A
CLOK pin
SENS pin
OE
pin SOC2
T1
Command transfer
clock input
1
H
High or low output
SENS serial data
readout clock input
1
1
L
L
0
1
SENS output
Subcode-Q readout
clock input
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Subcode-Q output
Readout clock input of Spindle speed
the spindle speed
measurement result
1
L
1
measurement
result output
2
Various signal readout Various signal
1
1
1
L
L
L
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
3
clock input
output
Error rate readout
clock input
4
Error rate output
CD TEXT data
readout clock input
CD TEXT data
output
Readout clock input of Shock-proof
1
L
1
1
shock-proof memory
controller serial data
memory controller
serial data output
: don't care
1
2
3
See "§1-4. Description of SENS Signals" for the SENS output.
See Timing Chart 2-5 for the spindle speed measurement result.
The output signals are PER7 to PER0, FOK, GFS, LOCK, EMPH, ALOCK and VF9 to
VF0. For details, see Timing Chart 2-4.
4
For the error rate timing, see Timing Chart 2-6.
CKOUTSL2, CKOUTSL1:
These bits select the clock output from the R4M pin.
When the crystal is 16.9344MHz and XTSL = high, the output frequency is halved.
CKOUTSL2 CKOUTSL1
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
4.2336MHz output
8.4672MHz (R8M) output
4.2336MHz (C4M) output
Changes in CAV-W mode and variable pitch mode.
: preset
DTSL1, DTSL0: These bits select the data output from the DOUT pin.
In external mode, the data input through the LRCKI, BCKI and PCMDI pins is used.
DOUT output in the following tables is valid when $34A commands DOUT EN1 and DOUT
EN2 are both 1. In this case, see "$34A commands".
When $34A commands DOUT EN1 and DOUT EN2 are both 0, see "§4-5-2. Digital Out
from DA Interface Input".
At this time, the data from the CD DSP is output from the DOUT pin with a subcode is added.
– 56 –
CXD3048R
SDSL2, SDSL1: These bits select the data input to the DAC block and the data output from the PCMD pin.
SLDBBIN:
This bit selects the data input to the DAC block and the data output from the PCMD and
DOUT pins.
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0:
These bits set the C2PO conditions.
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0
00000000 to 11111111
Ptocessing
The C2PO upper limit value reflected to mon C2PO and
added to the write prohibited condition.
When SLDBBIN = 0, the internally connected data is selected. (default)
DTSL1 DTSL0 SDSL2 SDSL1 SDSL0 Input to DAC block DOUT output
PCMD output
DSP mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode
DSP & DAC mode
1
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Shock-proof
memory controller memory controller
mode
Shock-proof
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
1
& DAC mode
DSP mode
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode
DSP mode
1
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Shock-proof
memory controller memory controller
mode
Shock-proof
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
1
mode
DSP mode
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode
1
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
1
DSP mode
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode
1
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
External mode
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
1
: preset
1: The relationship between LRCK, BCK and PCMD changes according to the setting value.
When SDSL0 = 0, the LRCK, BCK and PCMD phase difference is constant but the LRCK frequency
changes when SDSL0 is switched.
When SDSL0 = 1, the LRCK frequency is constant but the phase difference between LRCK, BCK and
PCMD changes before and after SDSL1 is switched. When not switching the output data selection, set
SDSL1 and SDSL0 to the same value.
– 57 –
CXD3048R
When SLDBBIN = 1, the data input from the LRCKI, BCKI and PCMDI pins is selected.
DTSL1 DTSL0 SDSL2 SDSL1 SDSL0 Input to DAC block
DOUT output
PCMD output
DSP mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
External & DAC mode
External & DAC
mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
0
0
1
0
0
1
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
DSP mode
1
External & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
0
1
1
0
0
1
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
External mode
0
1
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
1
0
1
0
0
1
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
External & DAC mode
External mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
External & DAC mode
1: The relationship between LRCK, BCK and PCMD changes according to the setting value.
When SDSL0 = 0, the LRCK, BCK and PCMD phase difference is constant but the LRCK frequency
changes when SDSL0 is switched.
When SDSL0 = 1, the LRCK frequency is constant but the phase difference between LRCK, BCK and
PCMD changes before and after SDSL1 is switched. When not switching the output data selection, set
SDSL1 and SDSL0 to the same value.
– 58 –
CXD3048R
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 0) (preset: $A504000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A5
ZMUT
A
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
SMUT AD10 AD9 AD8
(Bass boost)
Data 5
Data 6
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 setup
0
0
0
ZMUTA:
This bit sets the zero detection analog mute on/off.
When "0", zero detection analog mute is on. (default)
When "1", zero detection analog mute is off.
When zero data is detected for both the left and right channels, the LPF block output is set
to center output.
SMUT:
This bit sets the soft mute on/off.
When "0", soft mute is off. (default)
When "1", soft mute is on.
AD10 to AD0:
These bits set the attenuation data. The attenuation data consists of 11 bits, and is set as
follows.
Attenuation data
7FF (h)
Audio output
+6.02dB
7FE (h)
:
+6.016dB
:
402 (h)
401 (h)
+0.017dB
+0.0085dB
400 (h)
0dB
3FF (h)
3FE (h)
:
–0.0085dB
–0.017dB
:
001 (h)
–60.206dB
000 (h)
– ∞
: preset
The audio output from 001 (h) to 7FF (h) is obtained using the following equation:
Attenuation data
Audio data output = 20 log
[dB]
1024
setup:
This bit can shorten the rise time of the VREFL and VREFR pins.
When "0", the rise time is not shortened. (default) (Recommendation setting when the
external capacitance is 1µF or less.)
When "1", the rise time is shortened. (Recommendation setting when the external
capacitance exceeds 1µF.)
Return setup to 0 after the VREFL and VREFR pins rise. (setup = 0 for normal use)
– 59 –
CXD3048R
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1) (preset: $A540A4)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A5
PDM OBIT OBIT
1
DAC HiCut BST
EMPH FILTER CL
0
1
0
1
0
1
PWDN ZDPL WOC
(Bass boost)
SEL
1
0
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
0
1
0
0
PWDN:
ZDPL:
This bit sets the DAC block operation mode.
When "0", the DAC block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power
consumption. (default)
The zero detection flag for the headphone volume circuit side is output from the LRMU pin.
When "1", the DAC block operates normally.
This bit sets the zero detection flag polarity.
When "0", the LRMU pin is set low during mute. (default)
When "1", the LRMU pin is set high during mute.
When WOC = 1, the DAC sync window opens. This is used to synchronize the DAC.
This bit sets the digital de-emphasis on/off.
WOC:
DAC EMPH:
When "0", digital de-emphasis is off. (default)
When "1", digital de-emphasis is on.
HiCutFILTER:
BSTCL:
This bit sets the high-cut filter on/off.
When "0", the high-cut filter is off. (default)
When "1", the high-cut filter is on.
This bit sets the bass boost level clear on/off.
1: On; the set bass boost level is cleared to 0dB.
0: Off; normal operation (default)
PDMSEL:
This bit switches the PDM signal output from the DAC block.
When "0", connect the external resistors and capacitors to the VREFL and VREFR pins. (default)
When "1", connect the external capacitors to the VREFL and VREFR pins.
100Ω
100Ω
AOUT1 (2)
Analog out
AOUT1 (2)
VREFL (R)
Analog out
2200pF
2200pF
22kΩ
22kΩ
VREFL (R)
1µF
1µF
LPF external circuit example (PDMSEL = 1)
LPF external circuit example (PDMSEL = 0)
OBIT1, OBIT0: These bits set the word length of the serial data output from the PCMD pin.
The serial data word length can be selected only when the data output from the PCMD pin
is set to DAC output.
OBIT1
OBIT0
Serial data word length
0
0
1
0
1
0
20 bits
18 bits
16 bits
: preset
– 60 –
CXD3048R
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 0) (preset: $A58000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
BBONBBONHBONHBON BBSL BBSL
A5
HBSL HBSL BBST BBST
0
1
0
1
1
0
(Bass boost)
1
0
Vdwn1 Vdwn0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
BBST BBST BBST BBST
Vup1 Vup0 Uth Lth
BBON1, BBON0: These bits set the bass boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
BBON1
BBON0
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bass boost is off.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 125Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 160Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 200Hz.
: preset
HBON1, HBON0:These bits set the high boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
HBON1
HBON0
Processing
High boost is off.
0
1
1
0
0
1
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 5kHz.
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 7kHz.
: preset
BBSL1, BBSL0: These bits set the boost level for bass boost.
BBSL1
BBSL0
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for bass boost is set to 10dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 14dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 18dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 22dB.
: preset
HBSL1, HBSL0: These bits set the boost level for high boost.
HBSL1
HBSL0
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for high boost is set to 4dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 6dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 8dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 10dB.
: preset
– 61 –
CXD3048R
BBST Vdwn1, BBST Vdwn0: These bits set the boost attack time (Vol Down) for bass and high boost.
Processing
BBST Vdwn1 BBST Vdwn0
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Vup1, BBST Vup0: These bits set the boost release time (Vol Up) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vup1 BBST Vup0
Processing
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Uth:
BBST Lth:
This bit sets the bass and high boost Uth.
When "0", Uth is set to –1.9dB. (default)
When "1", Uth is set to –0.9dB.
This bit sets the bass and high boost Lth.
When "0", Lth is set to –12dB. (default)
When "1", Lth is set to –4.4dB.
When the volume rises above Uth, the boost level is reduced. The speed at which the boost level is reduced
is the attack time.
When the volume falls below Lth, the boost level is increased up to the setting value. The speed at which the
boost level is increased is the release time.
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 1) (preset: $A5C000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A5
COMP
ON
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
(Bass boost)
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
PDM
0
0
0
INV
COMP ON:
PDM INV:
This bit sets the compressor on/off.
When "0", the compressor is off. (default)
When "1", the compressor is on.
This bit sets the DAC block PDM signal polarity.
When "0", the polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)
When "1", the polarity is set to inverted.
– 62 –
CXD3048R
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 0) (preset: $A604000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4
SMUT AD10 AD9 AD8
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A6
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
(Headphone)
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0
SMUT:
This bit sets the soft mute on/off.
When "0", soft mute is off. (default)
When "1", soft mute is on.
AD10 to AD0:
These bits set the attenuation data. The attenuation data consists of 11 bits, and is set as
follows.
Attenuation data
7FF (h)
Audio output
+6.02dB
7FE (h)
:
+6.016dB
:
402 (h)
401 (h)
+0.017dB
+0.0085dB
400 (h)
0dB
3FF (h)
3FE (h)
:
–0.0085dB
–0.017dB
:
001 (h)
–60.206dB
000 (h)
– ∞
: preset
The audio output from 001 (h) to 7FF (h) is obtained using the following equation:
Attenuation data
Audio data output = 20 log
[dB]
1024
– 63 –
CXD3048R
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1) (preset: $A640A4)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
PDM
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A6
DAC HiCut BST
EMPH FILTER CL
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
PWDN ZDPL WOC
(Headphone)
SEL
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
0
1
0
0
PWDN:
ZDPL:
This bit sets the headphone block operation mode.
When "0", the headphone block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power
consumption. (default)
When "1", the headphone block operates normally.
This bit sets the zero detection flag polarity. The zero detection flag for the headphone
volume circuit is output from the LRMU pin when $A6 PWDN = 0.
When "0", the LRMU pin is set low during mute. (default)
When "1", the LRMU pin is set high during mute.
When WOC = 1, the headphone sync window opens. This is used to synchronize the DAC.
This bit sets the digital de-emphasis on/off.
WOC:
DAC EMPH:
When "0", digital de-emphasis is off. (default)
When "1", digital de-emphasis is on.
HiCutFILTER:
BSTCL:
This bit sets the high-cut filter on/off.
When "0", the high-cut filter is off. (default)
When "1", the high-cut filter is on.
This bit sets the bass boost level clear on/off.
1: On; the set bass boost level is cleared to 0dB.
0: Off; normal operation (default)
PDMSEL
This bit switches the PDM signal output from the headphone block.
1 output
0 output
1 output
0 output
PDMSEL = 0
PDMSEL = 1
Left channel side waveform (Right channel side waveform is inverted.)
– 64 –
CXD3048R
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 0) (preset: $A68000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
BBONBBONHBONHBON BBSL BBSL
A6
HBSL HBSL BBST BBST
0
1
1
0
1
0
(Headphone)
1
0
Vdwn1 Vdwn0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
BBST BBST BBST BBST
Vup1 Vup0 Uth Lth
BBON1, BBON0: These bits set the bass boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
BBON1
BBON0
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bass boost is off.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 125Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 160Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 200Hz.
: preset
HBON1, HBON0:These bits set the high boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
HBON1
HBON0
Processing
High boost is off.
0
1
1
0
0
1
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 5kHz.
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 7kHz.
: preset
BBSL1, BBSL0: These bits set the boost level for bass boost.
BBSL1
BBSL0
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for bass boost is set to 10dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 14dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 18dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 22dB.
: preset
HBSL1, HBSL0: These bits set the boost level for high boost.
HBSL1
HBSL0
Processing
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for high boost is set to 4dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 6dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 8dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 10dB.
: preset
– 65 –
CXD3048R
BBST Vdwn1, BBST Vdwn0:
These bits set the boost attack time (Vol Down) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vdwn1 BBST Vdwn0
Processing
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Vup1, BBST Vup0:
These bits set the boost release time (Vol Up) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vup1 BBST Vup0
Processing
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Uth:
BBST Lth:
This bit sets the bass and high boost Uth.
When "0", Uth is set to –1.9dB. (default)
When "1", Uth is set to –0.9dB.
This bit sets the bass and high boost Lth.
When "0", Lth is set to –12dB. (default)
When "1", Lth is set to –4.4dB.
When the volume rises above Uth, the boost level is reduced. The speed at which the boost level is reduced
is the attack time.
When the volume falls below Lth, the boost level is increased up to the setting value. The speed at which the
boost level is increased is the release time.
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 1) (preset: $A6C000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A6
COMP
ON
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
(Headphone)
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
PDM
0
0
0
INV
COMP ON:
PDM INV:
This bit sets the compressor on/off.
When "0", the compressor is off. (default)
When "1", the compressor is on.
This bit sets the headphone block PDM signal polarity.
When "0", the polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)
When "1", the polarity is set to inverted.
– 66 –
CXD3048R
$A7 commands (preset: $A7200000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
(ShockA-p7roof
XOE
SL GTOP NOLIM SPSLREAD REF REF
SL
MSL2 MSL1 MSL0
OUT
SEL ON
0
1
1
1
memory setting)
XQOK XWRE CHECK WDCK COM
2
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
STA XWI XWI SPSLWQR A11 READREAD MON
SEL H2 H1 COM MON SEL S2
S1 SEL
ADDRST ADR
0
SEL
MO
SL XQOK:
SL XWRE:
This bit sets the XQOK control mode.
When "0", XQOK should be controlled for the period from when SCOR goes high until
GRSCOR goes high. (default)
When "1", XQOK should be controlled for the period while GRSCOR is high.
This bit sets the XWRE control mode.
When "0", XWRE should be controlled for the period from when SCOR goes high until
GRSCOR goes high. (default)
When "1", XWRE should be controlled for the period while GRSCOR is high.
GTOP CHECK:This bit controls GRSCOR generation when GTOP is high.
When "0", the GRSCOR generation circuit is not resynchronized even when GTOP is high.
When "1", the GRSCOR generation circuit is resynchronized when GTOP goes high. (default)
NOLIM WDCK: Always set to "1".
SPSL COM:
This bit sets whether to control XQOK, XWRE and XRDE with pins or serial data.
When "0", XQOK, XWRE and XRDE should be controlled with pins. (default)
When "1", XQOK, XWRE and XRDE should be controlled with serial data ($A8).
Note) The Data 3 D3 and Data 6 D1 bits should be switched somultaneously.
READ2,
READS2, READS1:
This bit sets the audio data readout speed from the shock-proof memory controller block.
READ2 READS2 READS1 Readout speed setting
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1× speed readout
0.5× speed readout
0.25× speed readout
—
2× speed readout
: preset
The shock-proof memory controller interior should be resynchronized after the readout speed
is switched. Execute the $AAX ADPWO command for resynchronization.
– 67 –
CXD3048R
REF SEL:
This bit sets the DRAM refresh rate. (Use this bit in conjunction with the $AC command
REFSEL2.)
REFSEL2 REFSEL
Reflesh rate
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
11.51ms/2048 times
5.81ms/2048 times
46.44ms/2048 times
23.22ms/2048 times
: preset
REF ON:
This bit sets the DRAM refresh function on/off.
When "0", the refresh function is off. (default)
When "1", the refresh function is on.
XOE OUT:
This bit switches the WFCK pin output mode.
When "0", WFCK is output from the WFCK pin. (default)
When "1", XOE is output from the WFCK pin.
MSL2 to MSL0: These bits set the DRAM area that can be accessed from the microcomputer.
MSL2
MSL1
MSL0 DRAM area that can be accessed from the microcomputer
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
The entire DRAM area can be used as audio data.
32K bits
64K bits
128K bits
256K bits
512K bits
1M bits
2M bits
: preset
ADDRST SEL: This bit selects the address reset mode.
When "0", the conventional address reset is used. (default)
When "1", the address is reset by the ADDRST command.
This bit selects the remaining valid addresses.
ADRMO:
XWIH2:
When "0", the conventional remaining valid addresses are displayed. (default)
When "1", the remaining addresses from 0000000 to 1111111 are displayed.
The XWIH condition addition is selected.
When "0", the condition is added. (default)
When "1", the write speed condition is added to the write prohibited condition.
The XWIH condition addition is selected.
XWIH1:
When "0", the condition is not added. (default)
When "1", the condition of failure access to DRAM is added to the write prohibited condition.
This bit selects the XWRE, XQOK and XRDE outputs.
When "0", XWRE, XQOK and XRDE output is prohibited. (default)
When "1", XWRE, XQOK and XRDE output is allowed.
WQR MON:
– 68 –
CXD3048R
A11 SEL:
STA SEL:
This bit selects the A11 pin function.
When "0", the A11 pin is used as the A11 pin. (default)
When "1", the A11 pin is used as a low-active write prohibit factor.
This bit selects the shock-proof memory controller status output.
When "1", the conventional ESP status is output. (See §4-13-3.)
When "0", the new shock-proof memory controller status is output. (default)
The status readout when STA SEL = 0 is as follows.
Signal
D0 XWPHD
Description
0: Write prohibited
1: Address updated
0: No valid data
D1 QRCVD
D2 XEMP
D3 monGRSCOR 1: GRSCOR present
D4 monC2PO
D5 GTOP
1: C2PO of the setting value or higher present
1: GTOP present in the preceding GRSCOR
Don't care.
D6
—
D7 AM13
D8 AM14
D9 AM15
D10 AM16
D11 AM17
D12 AM18
D13 AM19
D14 AM20
D15 AM21
D16
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
—
—
Don't care.
D17
Don't care.
D18 monADPCM
D19 XFUL
1: ADPCM compression error
0: No write area
D20 ROF
1: The DSP SRAM has overflowed.
1: The speed limit is exceeded for more than the set number
during one GRSCOR.
D21 SPOVER
D22 NOWR
1: Access is failed in the shock-proof memory controller.
Don't care.
D23
—
MONSEL:
This bit selects the COUT, XUGF, MIRR and XPCK pin functions.
When "0", these pins output the signals corresponding to the SRO1, MTSL1 and MTSL0
commands. (See the table on page 8.)
When "1", these pins output SCOR, QRCVD and GTOP, respectively.
– 69 –
CXD3048R
$A8 commands (preset: $A8F8)
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A8
XSOEO ADDR
SDTO
OUT
(Shock-proof
memory control)
1
0
0
0
XQOKXWRE XRDE XSOEO
0
2
ST
XQOK, XWRE, XRDE:
When $A7 command SPSL COM = 1, XQOK, XWRE and XRDE are controlled with serial
data. (default: 1)
XSOEO:
This bit controls the serial data from the shock-proof block.
Shock-proof block data is loaded to the serial readout register by detecting the falling edge
of XSOEO.
XSOEO2:
ADDRST:
SDTO OUT:
This bit is used when the microcomputer reads data from the DRAM. (default: 1)
The shock-proof memory controller block loads the data from the DRAM to the serial
readout register by detecting the fall of XSOEO2.
This command is valid when $A7 command ADDRST SEL = 1.
When "0", no operations are performed. (default)
When "1", the VWA, WA and RA are all reset.
This bit is used to output serial data from the shock-proof block to the SQSO pin.
When "0", various signals are output from the SQSO pin. For details on these signals, see
$8X commands SOCT1, SOCT0 and TXOUT. (default)
When "1", the shock-proof block serial data is output from the SQSO pin.
– 70 –
CXD3048R
$A9 commands (preset: $A90000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A9
SubQ SubQ SubQ SubQ
1
0
0
1
SubQ SubQ SubQ SubQ
A3 A2 A1 A0
0
0
0
0
(DOUT subcode-Q
setting)
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
SubQ SubQ SubQ SubQ
D3
D2
D1
D0
SubQA3 to SubQA0, SubQD7 to SubQD0:
These bits set the Ubit inside the DOUT generation circuit in the DAC block. Note that these
bits have no effect on the DOUT generation circuit in the CD DSP block.
SubQA3 SubQA2 SubQA1 SubAD0 SubQD7 SubQD6 SubQD5 SubQD4 SubQD3 SubQD2 SubQD1 SubQD0
Setting contents
Control, address
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Q1
Q9
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Movement number
Q17 Q18 Q19 Q20 Q21 Q22 Q23 Q24 INDEX number
Elapsed time within a
movement (minutes)
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
Q25 Q26 Q27 Q28 Q29 Q30 Q31 Q32
Q33 Q34 Q35 Q36 Q37 Q38 Q39 Q40
Q41 Q42 Q43 Q44 Q45 Q46 Q47 Q48
Elapsed time within a
movement (seconds)
Elapsed time within a
movement (frames)
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Q49 Q50 Q51 Q52 Q53 Q54 Q55 Q56 (Set to "0".)
Q57 Q58 Q59 Q60 Q61 Q62 Q63 Q64 Absolute time (minutes)
Q65 Q66 Q67 Q68 Q69 Q70 Q71 Q72 Absolute time (seconds)
Q73 Q74 Q75 Q76 Q77 Q78 Q79 Q80 Absolute time (frames)
DON DCL DUP1 DUP0 DLD
0
0
0
(Control command)
DON: This bit sets the Ubit output on/off inside the DOUT generation circuit in the DAC block.
When "0", Ubit is not output. (default)
When "1", Ubit is output.
DCL: This bit clears the elapsed time within a movement to "0".
The elapsed time is cleared to "0" at the falling edge of DCL (DCL = 1 → 0). (default: DCL = 1)
DUP1: This bit sets the absolute time counter operate/stop.
When "0", the absolute time counter is stopped. (default)
When "1", the absolute time counter operates.
DUP0: This bit sets the elapsed time within a movement counter operate/stop.
When "0", the elapsed time within a movement counter is stopped. (default)
When "1", the elapsed time within a movement counter operates.
DLD: This bit is used when setting the INDEX number, elapsed time within a movement, and absolute
time.
When "0", the settings cannot be changed. (default)
When "1", the settings can be changed. Note that "0" is output for the INDEX number, elapsed
time within a movement, and absolute time while DLD = 1.
The control, address and movement number settings can be changed regardless of the DLD setting.
– 71 –
CXD3048R
$A9E commands (preset: $A9E00000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A9E
(DRAM I/F)
DRD15 DRD14 DRD13 DRD12
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
DRWR DRADR
0
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
DRD11 DRD10 DRD9 DRD8 DRD7 DRD6 DRD5 DRD4 DRD3 DRD2 DRD1 DRD0
DRWR:
This bit sets write/read for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.
When "0", the read from DRAM mode is set. (default)
When "1", the write to DRAM mode is set.
DRADR:
This bit sets the address control method for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.
When "0", relative address control is set. (default)
When "1", absolute address control is set.
DRD15 to DRD0: These bits set the data to be written to the DRAM for access from the microcomputer to
the DRAM.
$A9F commands (preset: $A9F00000)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
DADR DADR DADR DADR
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
A9F
(DRAM I/F)
DADR DADR DADR DADR
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
15
14
13
12
19
18
17
16
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DADR19 to DADR0:
These bits set the DRAM address for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.
– 72 –
CXD3048R
$AA commands (preset: $AA00004)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AA
GR
SEL
ADP BIT BIT
ON SL1 SL0
ADP
WO
(Compression
setting)
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Data 5
Data 6
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
ADPCM ADPCM
0
0
0
ORMU
0
0
SEL
MUTE
ADPON:
This bit sets audio data compressed/uncompressed.
When "0", the audio data uses uncompressed mode. (default)
When "1", the audio mode is compressed mode.
BITSL1, BITSL0: These bits set the audio data compression mode.
BITSL1 BITSL0
Compression mode
0
0
1
0
1
0
4 bits
6 bits
8 bits
: preset
ADPWO:
The CD-DSP block LRCK and shock-proof memory controller block LRCK are resynchronized.
This command should be used when the read speed is changed by $A7 commands
READ2, READS2 and READS1.
When "0", not resynchronized. (default)
When "1", resynchronized.
Note) • Set the $AD command CDDSP SLEEP to 0 for resynchronization.
• ADPWO should be returned to "0" after ADPWO is set to "1" and one or more
LRCK cycle of CD-DSP block is waited.
GRSEL:
This bit selects the GRSCOR signal output. Note that GRSCOR is output from the WDCK
pin when $8 command SCOR SEL = 1.
When "0", the GRSCOR signal is output at the timing used inside the shock-proof memory
controller block. (default)
When "1", the GRSCOR signal generated by the CD DSP block is output.
This bit selects ADPCM compensation.
ADPCM SEL:
When "0", ADPCM is not compensated.
When "1", ADPCM is compensated.
ADPCM MUTE: This bit sets mute at ADPCM compensation.
When "0", it does not mute at ADPCM compensation.
When "1", it mutes at ADPCM compensation.
ORMU:
This bit controls the output signal from the LRMU pin.
When "0", the "0" detection flag for Lch and Rch (AND output) is output.
When "1", the OR output is made with the "0" detection flag for Lch and Rch (AND output)
and SYSM.
– 73 –
CXD3048R
$AB commands (preset: $AB000000)
Data 4
D3 D2 D1 D0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AB
(EFM playability
enhancement
setting)
ARD
TEN
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
ARDTEN:
This is the EFM playability enhancement setting.
When "0", the EFM playability enhancement function is off.
When "1", the EFM playability enhancement function is on.
Set this command in the condition when a disc is not being played back.
– 74 –
CXD3048R
$AC commands (preset: $AC0C001)
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
D3 D2 D1 D0
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AC
(Sync expansion
specification)
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
AVW
0
SFP5 SFP4 SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0
Data 5
Data 6
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
REF SLIM SLIM
OV4 OV3 OV2 OV1 OV0
SEL2
1
0
AVW:
This bit sets the sync protection window width automatic expansion function.
When "0", the sync protection window width automatic expansion function is off.
When "1", the sync protection window width automatic expansion function is on.
This setting is not affected by the sync forward protection times setting SFP5 to SFP0.
The sync protection window width (±6 channel clocks when WSEL = 0, ±26 channel
clocks when WSEL = 1) is widened 32 channel clocks at a time each time a sync mark
is inserted during the interval from the 16th forward protection until GFS goes high. When
the maximum window width is reached (when the window width exceeds 588 channel
clocks), GTOP goes high.
SFP5 to SFP0: These bits set the frame sync forward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to 3F (h).
For details on frame sync protection, see "§4-2. Frame Sync Protection".
Part of this command bit register is also used by $C SFP3 to SFP0. Of $AC SFP3 to
SFP0 or $C SFP3 to SFP0, the command bit setting made last is valid. When using an
existing status, set the value with $C SFP5 to SFP0. When using the $AC commands,
set $AC SFP3 to SFP0 to the value set by $C SFP3 to SFP0.
REFSEL2:
SLIM1, 0:
This bit sets the refresh rate to DRAM.
See the description of $A7 command REFSEL.
This bit sets the DRAM write speed limit value.
SLIM1
SLIM0
Write speed limit value
Up to 4.0× speed write
Up to 4.5× speed write
Up to 5.0× speed write
Up to 5.5× speed write
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
: preset
Note) This command is valid when $A7X XWIH2 = 1.
This bit sets the limit value of the speed violation number for one GRSCOR which is
reflected to XWIH.
OV4 to OV0:
OV4 to OV0
Limit value of speed violation number
Can be set from 1 to 31 times.
00000 to 11111
: Preset value: 00001
Note) • The violation speed is set with the $AC commands SLIM 1 and 0.
• This command is valid when $A7X XWIH2 = 1.
– 75 –
CXD3048R
$AD commands (preset: $AD040)
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AD
HCAV ERCNT
SLEEP SLEEP
DSP DSSP ASYM ESP
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP
LPF DSUB ASEQ
PCOL
0
1
1
0
1
ADCPS
(Sleep setting)
ADCPS:
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter.
When "0", the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter is set to normal. (default)
When "1", the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter is set to power saving.
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSP block.
DSP SLEEP:
When "0", the DSP block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the DSP block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power
consumption.
DSSP SLEEP: This bit sets the operating mode of the DSSP block.
When "0", the DSSP block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the DSSP block clock is stopped. In addition, the A/D converter and operational
amplifier in the DSSP block are set to standby mode. This makes it possible to reduce
power consumption.
ASYM SLEEP: This bit sets the operating mode of the asymmetry correction circuit and VCO1/VCO2.
When "0", the asymmetry correction circuit and VCO1/VCO2 operate normally. (default)
When "1", the operational amplifier in the asymmetry correction circuit is set to standby
mode. In addition, the multiplier PLL VCO1 and wide-band PLL VCO2 oscillation are
stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption.
ESP SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the shock-proof memory controller block.
When "0", the shock-proof memory controller block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the shock-proof memory controller block clock is stopped. This makes it possible
to reduce power consumption.
LPF SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the analog low-pass filter block.
When "0", the analog low-pass filter block operates normally.
When "1", the analog low-pass filter block is set to standby mode. (default) This makes it
possible to reduce power consumption.
DSUB SLEEP: This bit sets the operating mode of the Ubit generation block inside the DOUT generation
circuit in the DAC block. This setting has no effect on the DOUT generation circuit in the
CD DSP block.
When "0", the Ubit generation block operates normally. (default)
When "1", The clock for the Ubit generation block inside the DOUT generation circuit in the
DAC block is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption. Also, in this
case Ubit is set to "0".
ASEQ SLEEP: This bit sets the operation mode of the servo auto sequencer block.
When "0", the servo auto sequencer operates normally. (default)
When "1", the servo auto sequencer block clock is stopped. This makes the power
consumption to be reduced.
PCOL:
The PCOL pin in DSP sleep mode is fixed to low.
When "0", the PCO pin gradually becomes low by the external filter time constant. (default)
When "1", the PCO pin digitally becomes low.
Note) Set DSP SLEEP to "1" so that DSP sleep mode is entered.
HCAV SLEEP: This bit sets the hard CAV block operation mode.
When "0", the hard CAV block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the hard CAV block clock is stopped. This makes the power consumption to be
reduced.
ERCNT SLEEP: This bit sets operation mode for the error rate counter block.
When "0", normally operates. (default)
When "1", the clock in the error rate counter block stops. This reduces the power consumption.
The DAC block clock can be stopped by setting $A5 command PWDN (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1).
– 76 –
CXD3048R
$AE commands (preset: $AE0)
Data 4
D3 D2 D1 D0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AE
(Variable pitch
setting)
VARI VARI WTC SCSY SENS SENS SENS SENS
1
1
1
0
ON USE C2PO (sub) SEL3 SEL2 SEL1 SEL0
Processing
Command bit
VARION = 0
VARION = 1
Variable pitch mode is off. (The internal clock uses the crystal reference.)
Variable pitch mode is on. (The internal clock uses the VCO2 reference.)
Command bit
VARIUSE = 0
VARIUSE = 1
Processing
Set VARIUSE = 0 when not using variable pitch mode.
Set VARIUSE = 1 when using variable pitch mode.
See "$DX commands" for the variable pitch range and example of use.
WTC C2PO:
This bit selects the write prohibit factor to DRAM.
When "0", write prohibition is not allowed by the C2PO error number or external input.
When "1", write prohibition is allowed by the C2PO error number or external input.
Use this command only when $8 CDROM = 0.
• Use this command in conjunction with the $AX command A11 SEL and $A4 commands
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0.
SCSY (sub):
This bit sets the GRSCOR resynchronization period.
See the $8X command SCSY. (Set the $8X command to "0" when using this bit.)
SENS SEL3 to SENS SEL0:
SENS SENS SENS SENS
SEL3 SEL2 SEL1 SEL0
SDTO TEXT SOCT SOCT XSOE XSOE
SENS switching
SENS serial data
Subcode Q
SOC2
OUT OUT
1
0
0
02
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Various signals
Error rate
CD-TEXT
Shock-proof memory
controller status
Special area read
Special area status
VF0 to VF9
1
1
1
1
1
– 77 –
CXD3048R
$AF commands (preset: $AF8000)
Data 4
D3 D2 D1 D0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
AF
MDS MDP
CTL UP
MDP
CTL4
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 MDP
EA EA EA
MDP
EA OUTSL1 OUTSL0
(Spindle servo
setting)
0
1
1
1
1
LPWR2
0
Data 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
MDP MDP MDP MDP
CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0
SYG3EA to SYG0EA:
These bits set the spindle drive output gain. However, this is valid only in CLV-N mode.
SYG3EA SYG2EA SYG1EA SYG0EA
GAIN
0 (– ∞dB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0.125 (–18.1dB)
0.250 (–12.0dB)
0.375 (–8.5dB)
0.500 (–6.0dB)
0.625 (–4.1dB)
0.750 (–2.5dB)
0.875 (–1.2dB)
1.000 (0.0dB)
1.125 (+1.0dB)
1.250 (+1.9dB)
1.375 (+2.8dB)
1.500 (+3.5dB)
1.625 (+4.2dB)
1.750 (+4.9dB)
1.875 (+5.5dB)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
: preset
MDP OUTSL1, MDP OUTSL0:
These bits set the spindle drive output method.
MDP OUTSL1
MDP OUTSL0
Spindle drive output
Ternary output from the MDP pin
Binary output from the MDS and MDP pins
Command-based MDP and MDS output control
: preset
0
1
0
0
0
1
– 78 –
CXD3048R
LPWR2:
The low output (brake pulse) of the MDP pin can be masked.
When "0", binary output is high or low output, and ternary output is high, low or high
impedance output. (default)
When "1", high or high impedance is output. This makes it possible to mask the brake pulse.
This bit sets the PWM output polarity according to the setting from the microcomputer.
(valid when MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
When "0", the MDS pin output is set low.
MDS CTL:
MDP UP:
When "1", the MDS pin output is set high.
This bit switches the MDP pin according to the setting from the microcomputer. (valid when
MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
When "0", the MDP pin output is set to PWM output.
When "1", the MDP pin output is set high.
MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0:
These bits set the PWM output value according to the setting from the microcomputer.
(valid when MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
The carrier frequency is 176.4kHz. (88.2kHz when set to quasi-double speed)
At the minimum value (MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 0), the MDP pin output is set low.
At the maximum value (MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 1F (h)), the MDP pin output is set high
for 31/32 intervals.
Note that when $AF command MDP UP = 1, the MDP pin output is set high regardless of
the MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 setting value.
Command-based MDP and MDS output control (MDP OUTSL1 = 0, MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
(1) Timing Chart 1 LPWR2 = 0, MDP UP = 0, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)
5.67µs (176kHz)
MDP
The MDP waveform ratio is set by MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0.
When MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h), 10 (h)/20 (h) intervals are high.
(2) Timing Chart 2 LPWR2 = 0, MDP UP = 1, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)
H
MDP
When MDP UP = 1, MDP is fixed high regardless of MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0.
(3) Timing Chart 3 LPWR2 = 1, MDP UP = 0, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)
MDP
Z
When LPWR2 = 1, the low output of MDP binary output becomes high impedance.
– 79 –
CXD3048R
$BX commands
This command sets the traverse monitor count.
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Command
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Traverse monitor
count setting
• When the set number of tracks are counted during fine search, the sled control for the traverse cycle control
goes off.
• The traverse monitor count is set to monitor the traverse status using the SENS outputs COMP and COUT.
The monitor output is set as follows.
Data 5
D2 D1
Data 6
Command
D3
0
D0
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
Traverse monitor
count setting
0
MTSL1 MTSL0 ASYE MD2
Command bit
Output data
MTSL1
MTSL0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
XUGF
XPCK
MNT1
XPCK
FSTO
GFS
MNT2
XROF
GFS
C2PO
MNT3
GTOP
C2PO
MINT0
RFCK
C4M
: preset
However, the $39 command SRO1 and $A7 command MON SEL must be set to "0".
Command bit
ASYE = 1
Processing
Asymmentry is on.
Asymmentry is off.
ASYE = 0
: preset
Command bit
MD2 = 0
Processing
Digital Out on/off control. Off when "0".
Digital Out on/off control. On when "1".
MD2 = 1
: preset
– 80 –
CXD3048R
$CX commands
Data 1
D2 D1
Gain Gain Gain Gain Gain Gain
Data 2
Command
D3
D0
D3
D2 D1
D0
Spindle servo
PCC1 PCC0
coefficient setting MDP1 MDP0 MDS1 MDS0 DCLV1 DCLV0
Gain
CLV CTRL ($DX)
CLVS
• CLVS mode gain setting: GCLVS
Gain
MDS1 MDS0
Gain
Gain
CLVS
GCLVS
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
–12dB
–6dB
–6dB
0dB
0dB
+6dB
• CLVP mode gain setting: GMDP: GMDS
Gain
MDP1 MDP0
Gain
Gain
MDS1 MDS0
Gain
GMDP
GMDS
0
0
1
0
1
0
–6dB
0dB
0
0
1
0
1
0
–6dB
0dB
+6dB
+6dB
• DCLV overall gain setting: GDCLV
Gain
DCLV1 DCLV0
Gain
GDCLV
0
0
1
0
1
0
0dB
+6dB
+12dB
Command bit
Processing
PCC1
PCC0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The VPCO signal is output.
The VPCO pin output is high impedance.
The VPCO pin output is low.
The VPCO pin output is high.
• This command controls the VPCO pin signal.
The VPCO output can be controlled with this setting.
– 81 –
CXD3048R
Data 3
D2 D1
Data 4
D2 D1
Command
D3
D0
D3
D0
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0 SRP3 SRP2 SRP1 SRP0
Command bit
SFP3 to SFP0
Processing
Sets the number of frame sync forward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to F (h).
Command bit
Processing
SRP3 to SRP0
Sets the number of frame sync backward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to F (h).
See "§4-2. Frame Sync Protection" regarding frame sync protection.
• The CXD3048R can serially output the 40 bits (10 BCD codes) of error rate data selected by EDC7 to EDC0
from the SQSO pin and monitor this data using a microcomputer.
In order to output error rate data, set $C commands for C1 and C2 individually, and set $8 commands
SOCT0 and SOCT1 to "1". Then, the data can be read out from the SQSO pin by sending 40 SQCK pulses.
Data 5
D2 D1
Data 6
D2 D1
Command
D3
D0
D3
D0
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
EDC7 EDC6 EDC5 EDC4 EDC3 EDC2 EDC1 EDC0
Preset value: 00h
Error rate monitor commands
Command bit
Prpcessing
EDC7 = 0 EDC6
EDC5
The [No C1 errors, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [One C1 error corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [No C1 errors, pointer set] count is output When "1".
EDC4
EDC3
The [One C1 error corrected, pointer set] count is output When "1".
The [Two C1 errors corrected, pointer set] count is output When "1".
The [C1 correction impossible, pointer set] count is output When "1".
EDC2
EDC1
7350-frame count cycle mode 1 When "0".
73500-frame count cycle mode 2 When "1".
EDC0
EDC7 = 1 EDC6
EDC5
The [No C2 errors, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [One C2 error corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [Two C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [Three C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [Four C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [C2 correction impossible, pointer copy] count is output When "1".
The [C2 correction impossible, pointer set] count is output When "1".
EDC4
EDC3
EDC2
EDC1
EDC0
1
The values selected by C1 (EDC1 to EDC6) and C2 (EDC0 to EDC6) are added to C1 and C2, respectively,
and output every 7350 frames.
The values selected by C1 (EDC1 to EDC6) and C2 (EDC0 to EDC6) are added to C1 and C2, respectively,
2
and output every 73500 frames.
– 82 –
CXD3048R
$DX commands
Data 1
Command
D3
0
D2
TB
D1
TP
D0
Gain
CLVS
CLV CTRL
See "$CX commands".
Description
Command bit
TB = 0
Bottom hold at a cycle of RFCK/32 in CLVS mode.
Bottom hold at a cycle of RFCK/16 in CLVS mode.
Peak hold at a cycle of RFCK/4 in CLVS mode.
Peak hold at a cycle of RFCK/2 in CLVS mode.
TB = 1
TP = 0
TP = 1
Data 2
D2 D1
Data 3
D2 D1
Data 4
Command
CLV CTRL
D3
D0
D3
D0
D3
VP
D2
VP
D1
0
D0
0
VP7
VP6 VP5
VP4 VP3
VP2 VP1
VP0
CTL1 CTL0
The settings in CAV-W mode are as follows.
Command bit
Processing
Sets the spindle rotational velocity.
VP0 to VP7
Command bit
Processing
VPCTL1
VPCTL0
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 1.
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 2.
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 3.
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 4.
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
The above setting should be "0", "0" except for the CAV-W operating mode.
– 83 –
CXD3048R
The rotational velocity R of the spindle can be expressed with the following equation.
256 – n
32
R: Relative velocity at normal speed = 1
n: VP0 to VP7 setting value
R =
× l
l: Multiple set by VPCTL0, VPCTL1
Command bit
Description
VP0 to VP7 = F0 (h)
:
Playback at half (normal) speed
to
VP0 to VP7 = E0 (h) Playback at normal (double) speed
:
to
VP0 to VP7 = C0 (h)
Playback at (quadruple) speed
Notes) 1. Values when crystal is 16.9344MHz and XTSL is low or when crystal is 33.8688MHz and XTSL is high.
2. Values in parentheses are for when DSPB is "1".
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
DSPB = 1
1.5
1
DSPB = 0
0.5
F0
E0
D0
C0
VP0 to VP7 setting value [h]
– 84 –
CXD3048R
The settings in variable pitch mode are as follows.
Command bit
Processing
VPCTL1 to VPCTL0,
VP7 to VP0
Sets the pitch for variable pitch mode.
The pitch setting can be expressed with the following equation.
P: Pitch setting value
–n
10
P =
[%]
n: VPCTL1 and VPCTL0, VP7 to VP0 setting value (two's complement,
VPCTL1 = sign bit)
Command bit
VPCTL0 VP7 to VP0
00 (H)
Command setting
example
Pitch setting value [%]
VPCTL1
1
+51.2
to
$D60080
:
0
1
0
1
—
FF (H)
00 (H)
—
+25.7
+25.6
to
$D6FF80
$D600C0
:
1
0
0
FF (H)
00 (H)
—
+0.1
0.0
$D6FFC0
$D60000
:
to
FF (H)
00 (H)
—
–25.5
–25.6
to
$D6FF00
$D60040
:
E7 (H)
–48.7
$D6E740
The pitch setting range is from –48.7 to +51.2%.
The plus pitch setting should not exceed the playback speed given in the Recommended Operating Conditions.
An example of variable pitch mode commands is shown below.
$EX001 (Sets INV VPCO = 1.)
$AE4
$AEC
(Setting to enable variable pitch mode.)
(Turns on variable pitch mode. The internal clock uses the VCO2 reference.)
$D60A00 (Sets the pitch to –1.0%.)
$D60000 (Sets the pitch to 0.0%.)
$AE4
(Turns off variable pitch mode. The internal clock uses the crystal reference.)
– 85 –
CXD3048R
$EX commands
Command
Data 1
D2 D1
Data 2
D2 D1
Data 3
D2 D1
D3
D0
D3
D0
D3
D0
CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0 EPWM SPDC ICAP SFSL VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON
SPD mode
Command bit
Mode
Description
CM3
CM2
CM1
CM0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
STOP Spindle stop mode.
1
KICK Spindle forward rotation mode.
Spindle reverse rotation mode. Valid only when LPWR = 0
in any mode.
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
BRAKE
1
Rough servo mode. When the RF-PLL circuit isn't locked,
CLVS this mode is used to pull the disc rotations within the RF-
PLL capture range.
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
CLVP PLL servo mode.
Automatic CLVS/CLVP switching mode.
CLVA
Used for normal playback.
1
See Timing Charts 1-6 to 1-29.
In the digital CLV servo, the sampling frequency of the internal digital filter is switched simultaneously with
the switching of CLVP/CLVS.
Then, the CLVS mode cut-off frequency fc is 70Hz when $D command TB = 0 or 140Hz when $D command
TB = 1.
Spindle control can be set to the ternary output of only MDP or the binary outputs of MDP and MDS by
$AF commands MDPOUTSL1 and MDPOUTSL0.
Command bit
Mode
Description
INV
VPCO
EPWM SPDC ICAP SFSL VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON
Crystal reference CLV
servo.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
CLV-N
CLV-N
CLV-W
CAV-W
CAV-W
VCO2 reference CLV
servo.
Used for playback in
2
CLV-W mode.
Spindle control with
VP0 to VP7.
Spindle control with the
external PWM.
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
3
VCO-C VCO control
2
3
Figs. 3-1 and 3-2 show the control flow with the microcomputer software in CLV-W mode.
Fig. 3-3 shows the control flow with the microcomputer software in VCO-C mode.
– 86 –
CXD3048R
Timing chart –
Ternary output
Timing chart –
Mode
LPWR
0
LPWR2
0
Command
Binary output
1-18 (a)
1-18 (b)
1-18 (c)
1-19 (a)
1-19 (b)
1-19 (c)
1-20 (a)
1-20 (b)
1-20 (c)
1-21 (a)
1-21 (b)
1-21 (c)
1-22 (a)
1-22 (b)
1-22 (c)
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
1-6 (a)
1-6 (b)
1-6 (c)
1-7 (a)
1-7 (b)
1-7 (c)
1-8 (a)
1-8 (b)
1-8 (c)
1-9 (a)
1-9 (b)
1-9 (c)
1-10 (a)
1-10 (b)
1-10 (c)
CLV-N
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
CLV-W
CAV-W
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
Timing chart –
Ternary output
Timing chart –
Binary output
Mode
LPWR
LPWR2
0
CLV-N
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1-11
1-23
1-12
1-24
CLV-W
CAV-W
0
1-13
1-25
1-14 (EPWM = 0)
1-15 (EPWM = 0)
1-16 (EPWM = 1)
1-17 (EPWM = 1)
1-26 (EPWM = 0)
1-27 (EPWM = 0)
1-28 (EPWM = 1)
1-29 (EPWM = 1)
0
– 87 –
CXD3048R
Timing chart –
Ternary output
Timing chart –
Mode
LPWR
0
LPWR2
1
Command
Binary output
1-30 (a)
1-30 (b)
1-30 (c)
1-31 (a)
1-31 (b)
1-31 (c)
1-32 (a)
1-32 (b)
1-32 (c)
1-33 (a)
1-33 (b)
1-33 (c)
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
1-8 (a)
1-8 (b)
1-8 (c)
CLV-W
1-8 (a)
1-8 (b)
1-8 (c)
1
0
1
1
1
1
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
1-10 (a)
1-10 (b)
1-10 (c)
1-10 (a)
1-10 (b)
1-10 (c)
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
CAV-W
BRAKE
STOP
Timing chart –
Ternary output
Timing chart –
Binary output
Mode
LPWR
LPWR2
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1-13
1-34
CLV-W
1-13
1-35
1-15 (EPWM = 0)
1-15 (EPWM = 0)
1-17 (EPWM = 1)
1-17 (EPWM = 1)
1-36 (EPWM = 0)
1-37 (EPWM = 0)
1-38 (EPWM = 1)
1-39 (EPWM = 1)
CAV-W
1
Data 4
Command
SPD mode
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
Gain Gain
CAV1 CAV0
INV
VPCO
See page 86.
• This sets the gain when controlling the spindle with VP7 to
Gain
CAV1
Gain
CAV0
Gain
VP0 in CAV-W mode.
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0dB
Note) The Gain CAV1 and Gain CAV0 commands are invalid
–6dB
–12dB
–18dB
for spindle control with the external PWM.
– 88 –
Timing Chart 1-3
LRCK
48 bit slot
WDCK
CDROM = 0
C2PO
If C2 Pointer = 1,
data is NG
Rch 16-bit C2 Pointer
Lch 16-bit C2 Pointer
CDROM = 1
C2PO
C2 Pointer for upper 8 bits
C2 Pointer for lower 8 bits
C2 Pointer for upper 8 bits
C2 Pointer for lower 8 bits
Rch C2 Pointer
Lch C2 Pointer
Timing Chart 1-4
750ns to 120µs
1
2
3
80
81
96
SQCK
CRCF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D13
D14
L/R
SQSO
Subcode Q data
See "Subcode Interface"
15-bit peak data
Absolute value display, LSB first
Peak data
L/R flag
1
2
3
1
2
3
WFCK
SQCK
SQSO
96 clock pulses
96 clock pulses
L/R
CRCF
R/L
CRCF
16 bits
96-bit data
Peak data of this section
Hold section
Level Meter Timing
Timing Chart 1-5
1
2
3
1
2
3
WFCK
SQCK
96 clock pulses
96 clock pulses
CRCF
Measurement
CRCF
CRCF
Measurement
Measurement
Peak Meter Timing
CXD3048R
Ternary output from MDP pin ($AF MDPOUTSL1 = 0, MDPOUTSL0 = 0)
Timing Chart 1-6
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
Z
H
MDP
MDP
MDP
Z
L
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-7
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
Z
H
MDP
MDP
MDP
Z
L
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-8
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
MDP
MDP
MDP
MDP
MDP
MDP
MDP
Z
Z
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-9
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
Z
H
MDP
L
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-10
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
Z
Z
MDP
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
– 92 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-11
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
n · 236 (ns) n = 0 to 31
Acceleration
Z
MDP
132kHz
7.6µs
Deceleration
Timing Chart 1-12
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
Acceleration
Z
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
Deceleration
Timing Chart 1-13
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
Acceleration
Z
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
Timing Chart 1-14
CAV-W mode EPWM = LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
Acceleration
MDP
Z
264kHz
3.8µs
Deceleration
Timing Chart 1-15
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
Acceleration
Z
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
– 93 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-16
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
H
PWMI
L
Acceleration
H
MDP
L
Deceleration
Timing Chart 1-17
CAV-W mode EPWM = LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
H
PWMI
MDP
L
Acceleration
H
Z
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
Binary output from MDP and MDS pins ($AF MDPOUTSL1 = 1, MDPOUTSL0 = 0)
Timing Chart 1-18
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
L
STOP
H
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
H
L
L
L
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-19
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
L
H
H
L
L
L
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
– 94 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-20
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
H
BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
L
L
L
Timing Chart 1-21
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
L
STOP
H
MDS
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
H
MDP
L
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-22
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
MDS
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
MDP
L
L
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
– 95 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-23
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDS
L
Acceleration
Deceleration
H
MDP
132kHz
7.6µs
n · 236 (ns) n = 0 to 31
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
Timing Chart 1-24
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDS
L
L
Acceleration
Deceleration
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
Timing Chart 1-25
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
H
L
MDS
Acceleration
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
Timing Chart 1-26
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
Acceleration
Deceleration
L
L
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
MDS
– 96 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-27
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR=1, LPWR2 = 0
Acceleration
L
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
H
MDS
Timing Chart 1-28
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
H
PWMI
L
Acceleration
H
MDS
MDP
L
Deceleration
H
Timing Chart 1-29
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
H
PWMI
L
H
MDS
Acceleration
H
MDP
– 97 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-30
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
L
H
H
Z
Z
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-31
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
Z
Z
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-32
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
BRAKE
L
STOP
H
MDS
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
H
MDP
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-33
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
H
MDS
MDS
MDP
MDS
MDP
H
MDP
Z
Z
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
– 98 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-34
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
MDS
Acceleration
Deceleration
Z
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
Timing Chart 1-35
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
H
Z
MDS
Acceleration
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
Timing Chart 1-36
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
Acceleration
Deceleration
Z
L
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
MDS
– 99 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-37
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR=1, LPWR2 = 1
Acceleration
Z
MDP
264kHz
3.8µs
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
H
MDS
Timing Chart 1-38
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
H
PWMI
L
Acceleration
H
MDS
MDP
L
Deceleration
H
Timing Chart 1-39
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
H
PWMI
L
H
MDS
Acceleration
H
Z
MDP
– 100 –
CXD3048R
[2] Subcode Interface
There are two methods for reading out a subcode externally.
The 8-bit subcodes P to W can be read out from SBSO by inputting EXCK.
The subcode-Q can be read out after checking CRC of the 80 bits in the subcode frame.
The subcode-Q can be read out from the SQSO pin by inputting 80 clock pulses to the SQCK pin when SCOR
comes correctly and CRCF is high.
§2-1. P to W Subcode Readout
Data can be read out by inputting EXCK immediately after WFCK falls. (See Timing Chart 2-1.)
§2-2. 80-bit Subcode-Q Readout
Fig. 2-2 shows the peripheral block of the 80-bit subcode-Q register.
• First, subcode-Q, regenerated at one bit per frame, is input to the 80-bit serial/parallel register and the CRC
check circuit.
• 96-bit subcode-Q is input, and if the CRC is OK, it is output to SQSO with CRCF = 1. In addition, 80 bits are
loaded into the parallel/serial register.
When SQSO goes high after SCOR is output, the CPU determines that new data (which passed the CRC
check) has been loaded.
• When the 80-bit data is loaded, the order of the MSB and LSB is inverted within each byte. As a result,
although the sequence of the bytes is the same, the bits within the bytes are now ordered LSB first.
• Once the 80-bit data load is confirmed, SQCK is input so that the data can be read.
The SQCK input is detected, and the retriggerable monostable multivibrator is reset while the input is low.
• The retriggerable monostable multivibrator has a time constant from 270 to 400µs. When the duration when
SQCK is high is less than this time constant, the monostable multivibrator is kept reset; during this interval,
the serial/parallel register is not loaded into the parallel/serial register.
• While the monostable multivibrator is being reset, data cannot be loaded in the peak detection parallel/serial
register or the 80-bit parallel/serial register.
In other words, while reading out with a clock cycle shorter than this time constant, these registers will not be
rewritten by CRCOK and others.
• The previously mentioned peak detection register can be connected to the shift-in of the 80-bit parallel/serial
register.
For ring control 1, input and output are shorted during peak meter and level meter modes.
For ring control 2, input and output are shorted during peak meter mode.
This is because the register is reset with each readout in level meter mode, and to prevent readout
destruction in peak meter mode.
As a result, the 96-bit clock must be input in peak meter mode.
• The absolute time after peak is stored in the memory in peak meter mode as noted in "Description of peak
meter mode" on page 95. See Timing Chart 2-3.
• The clock is input from the SQCK pin to perform these operations. The high and low intervals of the clock
should be between 750ns and 120µs.
– 101 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-1
Internal
PLL clock
4.3218 ± ∆MHz
WFCK
SCOR
EXCK
SBSO
750ns max
S0 · S1
Q
R
WFCK
SCOR
EXCK
SBSO
S0·S1
S0·S1
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
P1
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
P1
P2
P3
Same
Same
Subcode P.Q.R.S.T.U.V.W Read Timing
– 102 –
Block Diagram 2-2
(AFRAM)
(ASEC)
(AMIN)
ADDRS CTRL
80-bit S/P Register
SUBQ
SIN
A
B C D E F G H
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Order
Inversion
H G F E D C B
SI
A
SO
80-bit P/S Register
ABS time load control
for peak value
Monostable
multivibrator
SHIFT
SHIFT
SQCK
CRCC
LOAD CONTROL
SO
SI
CRCF
Mix
Ring control 1
16-bit P/S register
Ring control 2
SQSO
16
Peak detection
Timing Chart 2-3
1
3
91
1
92
2
93
3
94
2
98
95
96
97
WFCK
SCOR
Determined by mode
SQSO
SQCK
CRCF1
CRCF1
CRCF2
80 or 96 Clock
Register load forbidder
Monostable
multivibrator
(Internal)
270 to 400µ when SQCK = high.
750ns to 120µs
SQCK
SQSO
CRCF
ADR0
ADR1
ADR2
ADR3
CTL0
CTL1
CTL2
CTL3
300ns max
Timing Chart 2-4
Example: $802000 latch
Set SQCK high during this interval.
XLAT
750ns or more
Internal signal latch
SQCK
SQSO
PER0
PER1
PER2
PER3
PER4
PER5
PER6
PER7
C1F0
C1F1
C1F2
C2F0
C2F1
C2F2
FOK
GFS
LOCK EMPH ALOCK
VF0
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
VF6
VF7
VF8
VF9
Signal
Description
PER0 to PER7 RF jitter amount (used to adjust the focus bias). 8-bit binary data in PER0 = LSB, PER7 = MSB.
FOK
GFS
Focus OK.
High when the frame sync and the insertion protection timing match.
GFS is sampled at 460Hz; when GFS is high, this pin outputs a high signal. If GFS is low eight consecutive samples, this pin
outputs low.
LOCK
EMPH
ALOCK
High when the playback disc has emphasis.
GFS is sampled at 460Hz; when GFS is high eight consecutive samples, this pin outputs a high signal. If GFS is low eight
consecutive samples, this pin outputs low.
Used in CAV-W mode. The result obtained by measuring the rotational velocity of the disc. (See Timing Chart 2-5.) VF0 = LSB,
VF9 = MSB.
VF0 to VF9
C1F2
C1F1
C1F0
Description
No C1 errors; C1 pointer reset
One C1 error corrected; C1 pointer reset
—
C2F2
C2F1
C2F0
Description
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No C2 errors; C2 pointer reset
One C2 error corrected; C2 pointer reset
Two C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset
Three C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset
Four C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset
—
—
No C1 errors; C1 pointer set
One C1 error corrected; C1 pointer set
Two C1 errors corrected; C1 pointer set
C1 correction impossible; C1 pointer set
C2 correction impossible; C1 pointer copy
C2 correction impossible; C2 pointer set
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-5
Measurement interval (approximately 3.8µs)
Reference window
(132.2kHz)
Measurement pulse
(V16M/2)
Measurement counter
VF0 to VF9
Load
m
The relative velocity of the disc can be obtained with the following equation.
m + 1
R =
(R: Relative velocity, m: Measurement results)
32
VF0 to VF9 is the result obtained by counting V16M/2 pulses while the reference signal (132.2kHz) generated
from XTAL (XTAI, XTAO) (384Fs) is high. This value is 31 when the disc is rotating at normal speed and 63
when it is rotating at double speed (when DSPB is low).
XLAT
Set SQCK high during this period.
750ns or more
SQCK
"H" or "L"
SQSO
VF0
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
VF6
VF7
VF8
VF9
– 106 –
Timing Chart 2-6
XLAT
SQCK
SQSO
C1 MSB 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C1 error rate
C2 error rate
0
7
3
5
0
0
7
3
5
0
CXD3048R
[3] Description of Modes
This LSI has three basic operating modes using a combination of spindle control and the PLL. The operations
for each mode are described below.
§3-1. CLV-N Mode
This mode is compatible with the CXD2510Q, and operation is the same as for conventional control. The PLL
capture range is ±150kHz.
§3-2. CLV-W Mode
This is the wide capture range mode. This mode allows the conventional PLL to follow the rotational velocity of
the disc. This rotational following control uses the built-in VCO2. The spindle is the same CLV servo as for the
conventional series. Operation using the built-in VCO2 is described below.
When starting to rotate the disc and/or speeding up to the lock range from the condition where the disc is
stopped, CAV-W mode should be used. Specifically, first send $E665X to set CAV-W mode and kick the disc,
then send $E60CX to set CLV-W mode if ALOCK is high, which can be read out serially from the SQSO pin.
CLV-W mode can be used while ALOCK is high. The microcomputer monitors the serial data output, and must
return the operation to the speed adjusting state (CAV-W mode) when ALOCK becomes low. The control flow
according to the microcomputer software in CLV-W mode is shown in Fig. 3-2.
In CLV-W mode (normal), low power consumption is achieved by setting LPWR high. Control was formerly
performed by applying acceleration and deceleration pulses to the spindle motor. However, when LPWR is set
high, deceleration pulses are not output, thereby achieving low power consumption mode.
Note) The capture range for this mode is theoretically up to the signal processing limit.
§3-3. CAV-W Mode
This is CAV mode. In this mode, the external clock is fixed and it is possible to control the spindle to the
desired rotational velocity. The rotational velocity is determined by the VP0 to VP7 setting values or the
external PWM. When controlling the spindle with VP0 to VP7, setting CAV-W mode with the $E665X command
and controlling VP0 to VP7 with the $DX commands allows the rotational velocity to be varied from low speed
to quadruple speed. (See "$DX commands".) When controlling the spindle with the external PWM, the PWMI
pin is binary input which becomes KICK during high intervals and BRAKE during low intervals.
The microcomputer can know the rotational velocity using the internal master clock frequency as the
parameter. With XTAL (XTAI, XTAO) (384Fs) as the reference frequency, the result after measuring the high
interval by the internal master clock is output in 10 bits (VP0 to VP9) from the new CPU interface. These
measurement results are 31 when the disc is rotating at normal speed or 127 when it is rotating at quadruple
speed. These values match those of the 256 – n for control with VP0 to VP7. (See Timing Chart 2-5.)
In CAV-W mode, the spindle is set to the desired rotational velocity and the operation speed for the entire
system follows this rotational velocity. Therefore, the cycles for the Fs system clock, PCM data and all other
output signals from this LSI change according to the rotational velocity of the disc.
Note) The capture range for this mode is theoretically up to the signal processing limit.
Note) Set FLFC to "1" for this mode
– 108 –
CXD3048R
§3-4. VCO-C Mode
This is VCO control mode. In this mode, the oscillation frequency of the internal master clock (VCLK) can be
controlled by setting $D commands VP0 to VP7 and VPCTL0, 1. The VCLK oscillation frequency can be
expressed by the following equation.
1 (256 – n)
32
n: VP0 to VP7 setting value
1: VPCTL0, 1 setting value
VCLK =
The VCO1 oscillation frequency is determined by VCLK. The VCO1 frequency can be expressed by the
following equation.
• When DSPB = 0
49
VCO1 = VCLK ×
24
• When DSPB = 1
49
VCO1 = VCLK ×
16
– 109 –
CXD3048R
Operation mode
Spindle mode
CAV-W
CLVS
CLV-W
CLVP
Rotational velocity
Target speed
KICK
Time
LOCK
ALOCK
Fig. 3-1. Disc Stop to Regular Playback in CLV-W Mode
CLV-W Mode
CLV-W MODE
START
KICK
$E8000
Mute OFF $A00XXXX
CAV-W $E665X
(CLVA)
NO
ALOCK = H ?
YES
CLV-W $E60CX
(CLVA)
(WFCK PLL)
YES
ALOCK = L ?
NO
Fig. 3-2. CLV-W Mode Flow Chart
– 110 –
CXD3048R
VCO-C Mode
Access START
R?
What is the playback speed when access ends?
(How many minutes
of absolute time?)
n?
Calculate VP0 to VP7.
(Calculate n)
Switch to VCO control mode.
EPWM = SPDC = ICAP = SFSL = VC2C = LPWR = 0
HIFC = VPON = 1
Transfer
$E00510
Transfer
Transfer VP0 to VP7. (
corresponds to VP0 to VP7.)
$DX
XX
Track Jump
Subroutine
Switch to normal-speed playback mode.
EPWM = SFSL = VC2C = LPWR = 0
SPDC = ICAP = HIFC = VPON = 1
Transfer
$E66500
Access END
Fig. 3-3. Access Flow Chart Using VCO Control
– 111 –
CXD3048R
[4] Description of other functions
§4-1. Channel Clock Recovery by Digital PLL Circuit
• The channel clock is necessary for demodulating the EFM signal regenerated by the optical system.
Assuming T as the channel clock cycle, the EFM signal is modulated in an integer multiple of T from 3T to
11T.
In order to read the information in the EFM signal, this integer value must be read correctly. As a result, T,
that is the channel clock, is necessary.
In an actual player, a PLL is necessary to recover the channel clock because the fluctuation in the spindle
rotation alters the width of the EFM signal pulses.
The block diagram of this PLL is shown in Fig. 4-1.
The CXD3048R has a built-in three-stage PLL.
• The first-stage PLL is a wide-band PLL. When using the internal VCO2, an external LPF is necessary.
The output of this first-stage PLL is used as a reference for all clocks within the LSI.
• The second-stage PLL generates the high-frequency clock needed by the third-stage digital PLL.
• The third-stage PLL is a digital PLL that recovers the actual channel clock.
• The digital PLL in CLV-N mode has a secondary loop, and is controlled by the primary loop (phase) and the
secondary loop (frequency). When FLFC = 1, the secondary loop can be turned off. High frequency
components such as 3T and 4T may contain deviations. In such cases, turning the secondary loop off yields
better playability. However, in this case the capture range becomes ±50kHz.
• A new digital PLL has been provided for CLV-W mode to follow the rotational velocity of the disc in addition to
the conventional secondary loop.
– 112 –
CXD3048R
Block Diagram 4-1
CLV-W
CAV-W
Spindle rotation information
Clock input
XTAI
VPCO
1/2
1/32
CLV-N
XTSL
1/2
1/l
1/n
CLV-W
CAV-W
/CLV-N
LPF
l = 1, 2, 3, 4
(VPCTL0, 1)
n = 1 to 256
(VP7 to 0)
VCOSEL2
Microcomputer
control
VCTL
1/K
VCO2
(KSL1, KSL0)
2/1 MUX
VPON
1/M
1/N
PCO
FILI
FILO
CLTV
1/K
VCO1
(KSL3, KSL2)
VCOSEL1
Digital PLL
RFPLL
– 113 –
CXD3048R
§4-2. Frame Sync Protection
• In normal-speed playback, a frame sync is recorded approximately every 136µs (7.35kHz). This signal is
used as a reference to recognize the data within a frame. Conversely, if the frame sync cannot be
recognized, the data is processed as error data because the data cannot be recognized. As a result,
recognizing the frame sync properly is extremely important for improving playability.
• In the CXD3048R, window protection and forward protection/backward protection have been adopted for
frame sync protection. These functions achieve very powerful frame sync protection. There are two window
widths; one for cases where a rotational disturbance affects the player and the other for cases where there is
no rotational disturbance (WSEL = 0/1). In addition, the forward protection counter is set to 12 , and the
backward protection counter to 3 . Concretely, when the frame sync is being played back normally and then
cannot be detected due to scratches, etc., a maximum of 12 frames are inserted. If the frame sync cannot be
detected for 13 frames or more, the window opens to resynchronize the frame sync.
In addition, immediately after the window opens and the resynchronization is executed, if a proper frame
sync cannot be detected within 3 frames, the window opens immediately.
Default values. These values can be set as desired by $C commands SFP3 to SFP0 and SRP3 to SRP0.
§4-3. Error Correction
• In the CD format, one 8-bit data contains two error correction codes, C1 and C2. For C1 correction, the code
is created with 28-byte information and 4-byte C1 parity.
For C2 correction, the code is created with 24-byte information and 4-byte parity.
Both C1 and C2 are Reed-Solomon codes with a minimum distance of 5.
• The CXD3048R uses refined super strategy to achieve double correction for C1 and quadruple correction for
C2.
• In addition, to prevent C2 miscorrection, a C1 pointer is attached to data after C1 correction according to the
C1 error status, the playback status of the EFM signal and the operating status of the player.
• The correction status can be monitored externally.
See Table 4-2.
• When the C2 pointer is high, the data in question was uncorrectable. Either the pre-value was held or an
average value interpolation was made for the data.
MNT3
MNT2
MNT1
MNT0
Description
C1 pointer reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No C1 errors;
One C1 error corrected;
C1 pointer reset
—
—
No C1 errors;
C1 pointer set
C1 pointer set
C1 pointer set
C1 pointer set
C2 pointer reset
C2 pointer reset
C2 pointer reset
C2 pointer reset
C2 pointer reset
—
One C1 error corrected;
Two C1 errors corrected;
C1 correction impossible;
No C2 errors;
One C2 error corrected;
Two C2 errors corrected;
Three C2 errors corrected;
Four C2 errors corrected;
C2 correction impossible;
C2 correction impossible;
C1 pointer copy
C2 pointer set
Table 4-2.
– 114 –
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 4-3
Normal-speed PB
400 to 500ns
RFCK
MNT3
t = Dependent on error
condition
C1 correction
C2 correction
MNT2
MNT1
MNT0
Strobe
Strobe
§4-4. DA Interface
• The DA interface supports the 48-bit slot interface.
48-bit slot interface
This interface includes 48 cycles of the bit clock within one LRCK cycle, and is MSB first.
When LRCK is high, the data is for the left channel.
The output format from the bass boost block supports 18 bits and 20 bits in addition to 16 bits.
– 115 –
Timing Chart 4-4
48-bit Slot Normal-speed Playback
LRCK
(44.1K)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
24
BCK
(2.12M)
WDCK
PCMD
R0
L14
L13 L12
L11 L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
Lch MSB (15)
48-bit Slot Double-speed Playback
LRCK
(88.2K)
1
2
24
BCK
(4.23M)
WDCK
PCMD
R0
Rch MSB
L0
Lch MSB (15)
Timing Chart 4-5 (DAC output selected)
SDSL1 = 1, OBIT1 = 0, OBIT0 = 1
LRCK
(44.1K)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
24
BCK
(2.12M)
WDCK
PCMD
R0
L16 L15
L14
L13 L12
L11 L10
L9
L9
L8
L8
L7
L7
L6
L6
L5
L5
L4
L4
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
L1
L0
Rch MSB
Rch MSB
Lch MSB (17)
SDSL = 1, OBIT1 = 0, OBIT0 = 0
PCMD
R0
L14
L13 L12
L11 L10
L0
L18 L17 L16 L15
Lch MSB (19)
CXD3048R
§4-5. Digital Out
There are three Digital Out: the type 1 format for broadcasting stations, the type 2 form 1 format for home use,
and the type 2 form 2 format for the manufacture of software.
The CXD3048R supports type 2 form 1.
This LSI supports two kinds of Digital Out generation methods; generation from the PCM data read out from
the disc, and generation from the DA interface inputs (PCMDI, LRCKI, BCKI).
The timing accuracy of output data depends on the signal accuracy input
to XTAI, XTAO pins in CLV-N mode, and the built-in VCO accuracy in VCO-C mode.
§4-5-1. Digital Out from PCM Data
The Digital Out is generated from the PCM data which is read out from the disc.
The clock accuracy of the channel status is automatically set to level II when the crystal clock is used and to
level III in CAV-W mode, VCO-C mode or variable pitch mode. In addition, the subcode-Q data matched twice
in succession with CRC check are input to the initial 4 bits (bits 0 to 3).
DOUT is output when the crystal is 34MHz and XTSL is high in CLV-N or CLV-W mode with DSPB = 1.
Therefore, DOUT is set to off by setting the $B command MD2 to "0".
Digital Out C bit
0
1
2
3
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
1
9
0
10
0
11
0
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
0
From sub Q
ID0 ID1 COPY Emph
0
16
32
48
0/1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
176
bit0 to 3 Subcode-Q control bits that matched twice in succesion with CRCOK
bit29
VPON or VARION: 1
Crystal: 0
Table 4-5-1.
– 118 –
CXD3048R
§4-5-2. Digital Out from DA Interface Input
The Digital Out is generated from the DA interface input.
Validity Flag and User Data
The Validity Flag is fixed to "0".
The User Data is fixed to "0" or it can be output according to the format by setting 0 data.
For the Q data, first set the Q1 to Q80 data using the $A90 to $A99 commands, then the set data can be
output according to the digital interface format using the $A9A command. In addition, CRC operations are
performed internally on the Q81 to Q96 data and then this data is output.
The data is output in the order shown in Table 4-5-2.
The setting flow is shown in Figs. 4-5 (a) and 4-5 (b). Fig. 4-5 (a) shows the case when changing all the data,
and Fig. 4-5 (b) the case when changing the INDEX, movement time and absolute time.
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
:
3
0
0
0
0
0
:
4
0
0
0
0
0
:
5
0
0
0
0
0
:
6
0
0
0
0
0
:
7
0
0
0
0
0
:
8
0
0
0
0
0
:
9
0
0
0
0
0
:
10
0
0
0
0
0
:
11
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
12
24
36
48
:
0
Q1
Q2
Q3
:
1164
1
Q96
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 4-5-2.
– 119 –
CXD3048R
Channel Status Data
For the Channel Status Data, bits 0, 6 and 7 are fixed to "0". The following items can be set by bits 1, 2, 3 and 8.
a) Digital data/audio data
b) Digital copy enabled/prohibited
c) With/without emphasis
d) Category code (2 types possible)
Digital Out C bit
0
0
1
2
3
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
9
0
10
0
11
0
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
0
A/D COPYEMPH
SEL
CAT
b8
0
16
32
48
En
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
176
Table 4-5-3.
Note) In this method, DOUT can be set to off by setting $B command MD2 to "0" and $34A command
DOUT EN to "0".
– 120 –
CXD3048R
START
$A900
:
$A990
Set the subcode-Q information.
Input with BCD code.
Wait time 13.3ms
Output the subcode-Q information.
Start the movement time and absolute time counts.
$A9A0F0
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)
Stop subcode-Q information output to D-out.
Stop the movement time and absolute time counts.
$A9A040
(DON = L, DUP1 = L, DUP0 = L)
$A900
:
$A990
Set the subcode-Q information.
Input with BCD code.
Wait time 13.3ms
Input $A9A0F0
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)
(Output the changed subcode-Q information.)
Fig. 4-5(a). Flow Chart for Settings Using Q Data
START
$A900
:
$A990
Set the subcode-Q information.
Input with BCD code.
Wait time 13.3ms
Output the subcode-Q information.
Start the movement time and absolute time counts.
$A9A0F0
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)
$A9A0C8
(DUP1 = L, DUP0 = L, DLD = H)
(Stop the movement time and absolute time counts.)
$A920
$A930
:
INDEX
Movement
time
Note) The INDEX, movement and absolute time data
$A950
$A970
:
output to D-out while making the settings is all "0".
Absolute
time
$A990
Wait time 13.3ms
Input $A9A0F0
(DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H, DLD = L)
(Output the changed subcode-Q information.)
Fig. 4-5(b). Flow Chart for Settings Using Q Data
– 121 –
CXD3048R
Digital Audio Data Input
The input signal of the digital audio data is input through the DAC input signal pins PCMDI, LRCKI and BCKI.
The input format supports the 48-bit slot, MSB first.
Mute Function
By setting the command bit DOUT_DMUT to "1", all the audio data portions in the Digital Out output can be
set to "0" without altering the Channel Status Data.
Input/Output Synchronization Circuit
In normal operation, the DAC automatically synchronizes with the input LRCK. However, synchronization may
not be achieved when the input data contains much jitter or during power-on, etc. In such cases, internal
operation should be forcibly resynchronized by setting the $34A command DOUT WOD to "1". Forced
synchronization is also required when the operating frequency is changed such as switching between CLV and
CAV, etc. Be sure to set DOUT WOD to "0" and then to "1" for forced resynchronization.
Resynchronization clears the internal frame counter so that the count starts over from frame 0 after the
resynchronization processing. In cases where automatic resynchronization processing is not desirable or the
user wants to do it manually, set the $34A command WINEN to "0" to disable the resynchronization circuit.
DOUT Circuit Clock System
For the DOUT block, the master clock is set using the clock control command MCSL ($A) employed by the
DAC block. Set MCSL to "1" for 768fs, and to "0" for 384fs.
– 122 –
DOUT Block Input Timing Chart
48-bit slot
LRCK
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BCKI
PCMDI
R0
L14 L13
L12 L11 L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
Lch MSB (15)
CXD3048R
§4-6. Servo Auto Sequence
This function performs a series of controls, including auto focus and track jumps. When the auto sequence
command is received from the CPU, auto focus, 1-track jump, 2N-track jump, fine search and M-track move
are executed automatically.
The servo block operates according to the built-in program during the auto sequence execution (when XBUSY =
low), so that commands from the CPU, that is $0, 1, 2 and 3 commands, are not accepted. ($4 to E commands
are accepted.) When the auto sequencer is used, $9X command A.SEC ON-OFF is turned on.
In addition, when using the auto sequence, turn the A.SEQ ON-OFF of register 9 on.
When CLOK goes from low to high while XBUSY is low, XBUSY does not become high for a maximum of
100µs after that point. This is to prevent the transfer of erroneous data to the servo when XBUSY changes
from low to high by the monostable multivibrator, which is reset by CLOK being low (when XBUSY is low).
In addition, a MAX timer is built into this LSI as a countermeasure against abnormal operation due to external
disturbances, etc. When the auto sequence command is sent from the CPU, this command assumes a $4XY
format, in which X specifies the command and Y sets the MAX timer value and timer range. If the executed
auto sequence command does not terminate within the set timer value, the auto sequence is interrupted (like
$40). See "[1] $4X commands" concerning the timer value and range. Also, the MAX timer is invalidated by
inputting $4X0.
Although this command is explained in the format of $4X in the following command descriptions, the timer
value and timer range are actually sent together from the CPU.
(a) Auto focus ($47)
Focus search-up is performed, FOK and FZC are checked, and the focus servo is turned on.
If $47 is received from the CPU, the focus servo is turned on according to Fig. 4-6. The auto focus starts with
focus search-up, and note that the pickup should be lowered beforehand (focus search-down). In addition,
blind E of register 5 is used to eliminate FZC chattering. Concretely, the focus servo is turned on at the falling
edge of FZC after FZC has been continuously high for a longer time than E.
(b) Track jump
1, 10 and 2N-track jumps are performed respectively. Always use this when the focus, tracking, and sled
servos are on. Note that tracking gain-up and braking-on ($17) should be sent beforehand because they are
not involved in this sequence.
• 1-track jump
When $48 ($49 for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 1-track jump is performed in accordance
with Fig. 4-7. Set blind A and brake B with register 5.
• 10-track jump
When $4A ($4B for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 10-track jump is performed in
accordance with Fig. 4-8. The principal difference from the 1-track jump is to kick the sled. In addition, after
kicking the actuator, when 5 tracks have been counted through COUT, the brake is applied to the actuator.
Then, when the actuator speed is found to have slowed up enough (determined by the COUT cycle
becoming longer than the overflow C set with register 5), the tracking and sled servos are turned on.
– 124 –
CXD3048R
• 2N-track jump
When $4C ($4D for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 2N-track jump is performed in
accordance with Fig. 4-9. The track jump count N is set with register 7. Although N can be set to 216 tracks,
note that the setting is actually limited by the actuator. COUT is used for counting the number of jumps
when N is less than 16, and MIRR is used when N is 16 or more.
Although the 2N-track jump basically follows the same sequence as the 10-track jump, the one difference is
that after the tracking servo is turned on, the sled continues to move only for "D", set with register 6.
• Fine search
When $44 ($45 for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) fine search (N-track jump) is performed
in accordance with Fig. 4-10. The differences from a 2N-track jump are that a higher precision is achieved
by controlling the traverse speed, and a longer distance jump can be performed by controlling the sled. The
track jump count N is set with register 7. N can be set to 216 tracks. After kicking the actuator and sled, the
traverse speed is controlled based on the overflow G. Set kick D and F with register 6 and overflow G with
register 5. Also, sled speed control during traverse can be turned off by causing COMP to fall. Set the
number of tracks during which COMP falls with register B. After N tracks have been counted through COUT,
the brake is applied to the actuator and sled. (This is performed by turning on the tracking servo for the
actuator, and by kicking the sled in the opposite direction during the time for kick D set with register 6.)
Then, the tracking and sled servos are turned on.
Set overflow G to the speed required to slow up just before the track jump terminates. (The speed should
be such that it will come on-track when the tracking servo turns on at the termination of the track jump.) For
example, set the target track count N – α for the traverse monitor counter which is set with register B, and
COMP will be monitored. When the falling edge of this COMP is detected, overflow G can be set again.
• M-track move
When $4E ($4F for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) M-track move is performed in
accordance with Fig. 4-11. M can be set to 216 tracks. Like the 2N-track jump, COUT is used for counting
the number of moves when M is less than 16, and MIRR is used when M is 16 or more. The M-track move
is executed by moving only the sled, and is therefore suited for moving across several thousand to several
ten-thousand tracks. In addition, the track and sled servos are turned off after M tracks have been counted
through COUT or MIRR unlike for the other jumps. Transfer $25 from the microcomputer after the actuator
has stabilized.
– 125 –
CXD3048R
Auto focus
Focus search-up
FOK = H
YES
NO
NO
Check whether FZC is
continuously high for
the period of time E set
with register 5.
FZC = H
YES
FZC = L
NO
YES
Focus servo ON
END
Fig. 4-6-(a). Auto Focus Flow Chart
$47 Latch
XLAT
FOK
FZC
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
$08
Blind E
$03
Fig. 4-6-(b). Auto Focus Timing Chart
– 126 –
CXD3048R
1 Track
Track FWD kick
sled servo OFF
(REV kick for REV jump)
WAIT
(Blind A)
COUT =
YES
NO
Track REV
kick
(FWD kick for REV jump)
WAIT
(Brake B)
Track, sled
servo ON
END
Fig. 4-7-(a). 1-Track Jump Flow Chart
$48 (REV = $49) Latch
XLAT
COUT
BUSY
Blind A
Brake B
Command for
DSSP block
$25
$28 ($2C)
$2C ($28)
Fig. 4-7-(b). 1-Track Jump Timing Chart
– 127 –
CXD3048R
10 Track
Track, sled
FWD kick
WAIT
(Blind A)
(Counts COUT × 5)
COUT = 5 ?
YES
NO
Track, REV
kick
Checks whether the COUT cycle
is linger than overflow C.
C = Overflow ?
YES
NO
Track, sled
servo ON
END
Fig. 4-8-(a). 10-Track Jump Flow Chart
$4A (REV = $4B) Latch
XLAT
COUT
BUSY
COUT 5 counts
Blind A
Overflow C
$25
Command for
DSSP block
$2E ($2B)
$2A ($2F)
Fig. 4-8-(b). 10-Track Jump Timing Chart
– 128 –
CXD3048R
2N Track
Track, sled
FWD kick
WAIT
(Blind A)
Counts COUT for the first 16 times
and MIRR for more times.
COUT (MIRR) = N
YES
NO
Track REV
kick
C = Overflow
YES
NO
Track servo
ON
WAIT
(Kick D)
Sled servo
ON
END
Fig. 4-9-(a). 2N-Track Jump Flow Chart
$4C (REV = $4D) Latch
XLAT
COUT
(MIRR)
BUSY
COUT (MIRR)
N counts
Kick D
Blind A
$2A ($2F)
Overflow C
$26 ($27)
Command for
DSSP block
$2E ($2B)
$25
Fig. 4-9-(b). 2N-Track Jump Timing Chart
– 129 –
CXD3048R
Fine Search
Track Servo ON
Sled FWD Kick
WAIT
(Kick D)
Track Sled
FWD Kick
WAIT
(Kick F)
Traverse
Speed Ctrl
(Overflow G)
COUT = N?
YES
NO
Track Servo ON
Sled REV Kick
WAIT
(Kick D)
Track Sled
Servo ON
END
Fig. 4-10-(a). Fine Search Flow Chart
$44 (REV = $45) Latch
XLAT
COUT
BUSY
Kick D
$26 ($27)
Kick F
Kick D
$27 ($26)
Traverse Speed Control (Overflow G)
Command for
DSSP block
&
COUT N counts
$2A ($2F)
$25
Fig. 4-10-(b). Fine Search Timing Chart
– 130 –
CXD3048R
M Track Move
Track Servo OFF
Sled FWD Kick
WAIT
(Blind A)
Counts COUT for M < 16.
Counts MIRR for M ≥ 16.
COUT (MIRR) = M
YES
NO
Track, Sled
Servo OFF
END
Fig. 4-11-(a). M-Track Move Flow Chart
$4E (REV = $4F) Latch
XLAT
COUT
(MIRR)
BUSY
COUT (MIRR)
M counts
Blind A
$22 ($23)
Command for
DSSP block
$20
Fig. 4-11-(b). M-Track Move Timing Chart
– 131 –
CXD3048R
§4-7. Digital CLV
Fig. 4-12 shows the block diagram. Digital CLV outputs MDS error and MDP error signals with PWM, with the
sampling frequency increased up to 130kHz during normal-speed playback in CLVS, CLVP and other modes.
In addition, the digital spindle servo gain is variable.
Digital CLV
CLVS U/D
MDS Error
Measure
MDP Error
Measure
Oversampling
Filter-1
2/1 MUX
CLV P/S
Gain
MDS
Gain
MDP
1/2
Mux
+
Gain
DCLV
CLV P/S
Oversampling
Filter-2
Noise Shape
Modulation
KICK, BRAKE, STOP
PWMI
Mode Select
LPWR
MDP
CLVS U/D: Up/down signal from CLVS servo
MDS error: Frequency error for CLVP servo
MDP error: Phase error for CLVP servo
PWMI:
Spindle drive signal from the microcomputer for CAV servo
Fig. 4-12. Block Diagram
– 132 –
CXD3048R
§4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed
In the CXD3048R, the following playback modes can be selected through different combinations of the XTAI,
XTSL pins, double-speed command (DSPB), VCO1 selection command (VCOSEL1), VCO1 frequency division
commands (KSL3, KSL2) and command transfer rate selector (ASHS) in CLV-N or CLV-W mode.
1
2
Mode
XTAI
XTSL
DSPB VCOSEL1
ASHS Playback speed
Error correction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
384Fs
384Fs
384Fs
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0/1
0/1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1×
2×
2×
4×
1×
2×
1×
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: double
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
1
2
Actually, the optimal value should be used together with KSL3 and KSL2.
When $8 command ERC4 = 1, C2 is quadruple correction even when DSPB = 1.
The playback speed can be varied by setting VP0 to VP7 in CAV-W mode. See "[3] Description of Modes" for
details.
§4-9. Description of DAC Block and Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Circuits
The CXD3048R inputs data from the CD-DSP block to the DAC block via the shock-proof memory controller
block.
The data from the shock-proof memory controller block is output externally as bass-boosted data via the DBB
circuit.
When not using the DAC block, the data from the shock-proof memory controller block can be output directly to
the outside of the LSI.
Also, when not using the shock-proof memory controller, the data can be input directly from the CD-DSP block
to the DAC block.
The DAC block output format supports 16, 18 or 20 bits.
– 133 –
§4-10. DAC Block Input Timing
Fig. 4-13 shows the input timing chart to the DAC block.
The CXD3048R can transfer data from the CD-DSP block to the DAC block via an external route. This allows the data to be sent to the DAC block via an
audio DSP, etc.
Normal-speed Playback
LRCKI
(44.1k)
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BCKI
(2.12M)
L14 L13
L12 L11 L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
R0
Lch MSB (15)
PCMDI
Double-speed Playback
LRCKI
(88.2k)
1
2
24
BCKI
(4.23M)
PCMDI
Lch MSB (15)
Rch MSB
R0
L0
Fig. 4-13. Input Timing to the DAC Block
CXD3048R
§4-11. Description of DAC Block Functions
Zero Data Detection
When the condition where the lower 4 bits of the input data are DC and the remaining upper bits are all "0"
or all "1" has continued for about 300ms (16384/44.1kHz), zero data is detected. Zero data detection is
performed independently for the left and right channels.
Mute flag output
The LRMU pin goes active when any one of the following conditions is met. (when $AA command ORMU = 0)
The polarity can be selected by the $A5X command ZDPL.
• When zero data is detected
• When a high signal is input to the SYSM pin and the state continues for approximately 300ms
• When the $A5 command SMUT is set and the state continues for approximately 300ms
Attenuation Operation
Assuming the attenuation commands X1, X2 and X3, the corresponding audio outputs are Y1, Y2 and Y3
(Y1 > Y3 > Y2). First, the command X1 is sent and then the audio output approaches Y1. When the
command X2 is sent before the audio output reaches Y1 (A in the figure), the audio output passes Y1 and
approaches Y2. And, when the command X3 is sent before the audio output reaches Y2 (B or C in the
figure), the audio output approaches Y3 from the value (B or C in the figure) at that point.
0dB
400 (H)
A
Y1
B
Y3
C
Y2
–∞
000 (H)
23.2 [ms]
DAC Block Mute Operation
Soft mute
Soft mute results and the input data is attenuated to zero when any one of the following conditions is met.
• When attenuation data of 000 (h) is set
• When $A5 command SMUT is set to "1"
• When a high signal is input to the SYSM pin
Soft mute off
Soft mute on
Soft mute off
0dB
–∞dB
23.2 [ms]
23.2 [ms]
– 135 –
CXD3048R
Zero detection mute
Analog mute is applied to the respective channel when $AX command ZMUTA is set to "0" and zero data is
detected for the left or right channel. (See "Zero data detection".)
When $AX command ZMUTA is set to “0”, analog mute is applied even if the mute flag output condition is
met.
LRCK Synchronization
Synchronization is performed at the first rising edge of the LRCK input when reset.
After that, synchronization is lost when the LRCK input frequency changes, etc., so resynchronization must
be performed.
The LRCK input frequency changes when the master clock of the LSI is switched and the playback speed
changes such as the following cases.
• When the XTSL pin switches between high and low
• When the $9 command DSPB setting changes
• When the $A4 command MCSL setting changes
• When operation switches between CLV mode and CAV mode
For resynchronization, set the $A5 command XWOC to "1", wait for one LRCK cycle or more, and then set
XWOC to "0".
Digital High and Bass Boost
High and bass boost without external parts is possible using the built-in digital filter.
Perform the following operations when turning boost off or when lowering the current boost level.
1. Set $A5X command BSTCL to "1".
2. Wait 20ms or more, set the boost level or turn boost off, then set $A5X command BSTCL to "0".
High-cut Filter
This filter lowers the high-frequency level by approximately 8dB.
The frequency response is shown in Fig. 4-14.
0.00
–2.00
–4.00
–6.00
–8.00
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency [Hz]
Fig. 4-14. High-Cut Filter Frequency Response
– 136 –
CXD3048R
Compressor, Dynamic High and Bass Boost
1. Frequency Response and I/O Characteristics
Fig. 4-15 shows the frequency response for dynamic high boost and bass boost.
This figure shows the frequency response for a high boost turnover frequency of 5kHz and a bass boost
turnover frequency of 160Hz. The boost level and turnover frequency can be set independently for high
boost and bass boost. In addition, all frequencies are lowered by approximately 2dB in order to prevent
clipping, so the medium frequencies are –2dB output. The high boost and bass boost levels indicate the
relative values from this level.
Next, the compressor, high boost and bass boost I/O characteristics are shown in Fig. 4-17.
As shown in this figure, the compressor characteristics span all frequencies. In addition, the high boost and
bass boost characteristics are for when the input signal is sufficiently higher or lower than the turnover
frequency.
The boost levels can be set independently. Uth and Lth on the vertical axis are the gain control threshold
values, and the desired output value can be taken from the area enclosed by the parallelograms near these
levels. The Uth and Lth settings are described hereafter.
20.00
(1) HBSL1 = 0, HBSL0 = 0, BBSL1 = 0, BBSL0 = 0
(4)
18.00
16.00
(2) HBSL1 = 0, HBSL0 = 1, BBSL1 = 0, BBSL0 = 1
(3) HBSL1 = 1, HBSL0 = 0, BBSL1 = 1, BBSL0 = 0
(4) HBSL1 = 1, HBSL0 = 1, BBSL1 = 1, BBSL0 = 1
(3)
14.00
12.00
10.00
8.00
(2)
(1)
6.00
4.00
2.00
0.00
–2.00
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency response [Hz]
Fig. 4-15. Digital Bass Boost Frequency Response
– 137 –
CXD3048R
2. Settings
When performing dynamic processing, the auditory volume and other characteristics change according to
the boost levels and various other settings. The values that can be set by the serial commands and the
resulting effects are described below.
2-1. Boost Level
The boost level can be set independently for the compressor, high boost and bass boost. Boost level here
refers to the maximum boost level when a low level signal is input. The boost level changes over time when
a high level signal is input in order to prevent clipping.
2-2. Gain Control Thresholds
The gain control thresholds are Uth and Lth. When the level exceeds Uth, the gain is reduced; when the
level falls below Lth, the gain is increased. If both Uth and Lth are set to large values, the volume increases
and the respective boost effects are emphasized. On the other hand, some sources may be clipped due to
the balance with the boost level. These values can be set independently for the compressor and high/bass
boost. The same values are shared for high and bass boost.
2-3. Attack Time, Release Time
The attack time represents the speed at which the gain is reduced after high level input, and the release
time represents the speed at which the gain is increased when the input level suddenly becomes smaller. If
these values are set to "fast", the boost effects increase. Like the gain control thresholds, these values can
be set independently for the compressor and high/bass boost.
2-4. Envelope Detection Release Time
This sets the output signal envelope coefficient used for gain control. When set to "fast", the boost effects
increase. This setting is shared by compressor and high/bass boost.
Attack time
Standard
Slow
Release time
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Lch
High boost
Bass boost
+10dB
Uch
–12dB
–12dB
–12dB
–12dB
–1.9dB
–1.9dB
–1.9dB
–1.9dB
+14dB
Slow
+18dB
Slow
+22dB
Table 4-16. Recommended Dynamic Bass and High Boost Settings
– 138 –
CXD3048R
Input [dB]
0
Uth
Lth
Fig. 4-17. Dynamic Processing I/O Characteristics
Lth [dB]
–23
Uth [dB]
–8.0
Boost level [dB]
6
Compressor
High boost
Bass boost
–12/–4.4
–12/–4.4
–1.9/–0.9
–1.9/–0.9
4/6/8/10
10/14/18/22
– 139 –
CXD3048R
§4-12. LPF Block
The CXD3048R contains a secondary active LPF.
The LPF block application circuit is shown in Fig. 4-18.
100Ω
AOUT1 (2)
Analog out
2200pF
VREFL (R)
1µF
Fig. 4-18. LPF External Circuit
– 140 –
CXD3048R
§4-13. Description of Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Functions
§4-13-1. DRAM I/F
A 4M DRAM or 16M DRAM can be selected as the external buffer RAM. The 16M DRAM supports either row
address 212 and column address 210 or row address 211 and column address 211.
Refresh is performed by data access, and the refresh cycle is approximately 11.6ms when 4M DRAM is
selected, or approximately 46.4ms (210 × 212) or 23.2ms (211 × 211) when 16M DRAM is selected.
In addition, XRAS-only-refresh is executed 14 times in order to initialize the RAM after the power is turned on
and the DRAM, which is to be used by the $A4X commands RSL1 and RSL0, is selected. Data access to the
DRAM is not possible during this period.
XRST
XRAS
Approximately 5.67µs
14 times
§4-13-2. Switching from Data Through Mode to Shock-proof
The CXD3048R performs refresh by data access.
When switching from (1) Shock-proof mode to (2) data through mode to (3) Shock-proof mode, be sure to
reset all of WA, VWA and RA before performing data access for (3).
– 141 –
CXD3048R
§4-13-3. CPU Serial Data Output (when $A7X STASEL = 1)
Data is read out by setting the XSOEO command low and inputting SQCK. The data contents at the falling
edge of the XSOEO command are output from the SQSO pin at the falling edge of SCK.
XSOEO
SQCK
Invalid
SQSO
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D0: XWPHD
D1: QRCVD
Data write to DRAM prohibited signal (low for XFUL + ROF + WRNG)
Indicates whether XQOK was registered as a defined address after it was sent.
(High = registration OK)
D2: XEMP
D3: AM15
D4: AM16
D5: AM17
D6: AM18
D7: AM19
D8: AM20
D9: AM21
D10: XFUL
D11: ROF
Low when the DRAM is empty of valid data. (VWA = RA)
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
Low when the DRAM is full and there is no write area.
High when the DSP RAM has overflowed.
Note) When GRSCOR is low, QRCVD is high when data write to the DRAM is enabled, even if a negative
pulse is input to XQOK.
– 142 –
CXD3048R
§4-13-4. Data Linking
In order to restart write after PCM data write to the DRAM has been interrupted due to sound skipping or other
factors, continuity must be maintained between the data written last and the subsequent data to be written.
Conventional systems fix an aim at the data linking point, compare the preceding DRAM reference data with
the data read from the disc, and then link the data when matching data is detected. However, when using
music software where a fixed pattern is repeated, this system may link the data at an incorrect point. In
addition, if pre-value hold or interpolation is performed at the point to be linked, data linking may not be
possible at all. In order to eliminate these data linking errors, the CXD3048R generates a crystal accuracy
SCOR (= GRSCOR) synchronized to the PCM data to allow data linking along the time axis, thus greatly
increasing the data linking accuracy.
§4-13-5. Data Processing
The CXD3048R accumulates PCM data from the CD-DSP block in an external buffer and then inputs the data
to the DAC block in sync with the internally generated Fs system clock. At this time, the PCM data is loaded
and read out at the same rate during normal playback, so data does not accumulate in the buffer RAM.
Therefore, the loading rate must be increased. This is accomplished by setting the CD-DSP block to double-
speed mode and doubling the loading rate until the RAM is full. When the RAM becomes full, data regeneration
from the disc stops temporarily and the RAM data is read out to create an empty area, at which point loading
is restarted. These operations are then repeated to effectively use the entire area inside the RAM.
Shock-proof
4M DRAM
CD-DSP
DAC
PCM Data Flow (Example for 4M × 1 mode)
§4-13-6. System Outline (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)
The addresses for accessing the buffer RAM data consist of a readout address (RA) and a write address (WA).
The data to be written is not always correct, and the subcodes, etc. must be constantly checked to make sure
the data is correct and there is no sound skipping. The CXD3048R checks subcode-Q using the CPU, and
defines the data by inputting a negative pulse to the XQOK pin. This defined address (VWA) is loaded to the
internal register and the data between VWA and RA is treated as valid data. WA advances at a speed twice
that of RA, and RA is written by WA and read out sequentially in the order registered by VWA. When RA
catches up to VWA, there is no more valid data and readout is prohibited (XEMP = low). In addition, when WA
catches up to RA, the buffer is full and write is prohibited (XWIH = low). In this manner, write to the RAM is
interrupted when the RAM becomes full and there is no write area or when sound skipping caused by
scratches, external disturbances or other factors is detected. Data
WA
continuity must be ensured in order to restart write. Therefore, the
VWA
CXD3048R returns to the last defined address, and the CPU accesses
the defined address point it sent last (actually the data slightly before that
point) and reads the subcode-Q after the rising edge of SCOR. If the
subcode-Q matches the last defined address, XWRE is made to fall and
write is restarted when GRSCOR comes high within 7ms.
Note 1) If XWRE is made to fall when GRSCOR is low, XWIH goes
low and the write prohibited state results.
RA
Valid data
Note 2) When GRSCOR is low, VWA is not updated even if a
negative pulse is input to XQOK. Therefore, set XQOK high
while GRSCOR is low.
– 143 –
CXD3048R
§4-13-7. Data Write (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)
The PCM data input from the DSP is loaded according to the Fs system clock inputs (BCKI, WDCI and LRCI),
and is written sequentially to the external DRAM according to WA when the XWRE pin input goes low and
internal write is enabled (XWIH pin output = high).
The written data must be checked by some means or other. The CXD3048R assumes data checking with
subcode-Q. In this case, the CPU reads subcode-Q triggered by the SCOR signal output from the DSP to
determine whether sound skipping occurred. If sound skipping is not detected, the CPU inputs a negative
pulse to the XQOK pin during the GRSCOR high interval which comes within 7ms, and the data written to WA
thus far is registered to VWA as data without sound skipping.
SCOR
No sound skipping = CRC OK
No sound skipping = CRC NG
SUBQ
GRSCOR
XQOK
WA → VWA
Write prohibition is determined by the internal status or by an external command. When prohibited by the
internal status, the XWIH pin goes low, and this status is established when any one of the following conditions
is met.
1. There is no empty area in the DRAM.
2. The DSP RAM has overflowed.
XFUL = low
ROF = high
3. XWRE was made to fall when GRSCOR is low.
4. The DRAM write speed exceeds the set value.
WRNG = high
SPOVER = high
(when $A7 command XWIH1 = 1)
5. Access to DRAM in the shock-proof memory controller block failed. NOWR = high
(when $A7 command XWIH2 = 1)
monC2PO = high
6. The number of C2PO errors exceeds the set value.
7. Write is prohibited by the external input (A11 pin).
($AE command WTC C2PO = 1)
(when $A7 command A11 SEL = 1
and $AE command WTC C2PO = 1)
When the XWIH pin goes low due to the above conditions, the CPU must set the XWRE pin high and then the
XWIH pin high.
After the CPU sends XQOK, it must check whether XQOK was registered as a defined address. This is
because if the above conditions arise at the same time XQOK is sent, XQOK becomes invalid and the
addresses defined by the CPU and the CXD3048R may not match. Therefore, the XWIH pin output is used as
the XQOK recognition signal (QRCVD) while XQOK is low. When QRCVD is high, this indicates that XQOK
was correctly registered as a defined address (VWA was updated). When QRCVD is low, this indicates one of
the following conditions.
1. Write is prohibited due to the above conditions.
2. XWRE is high.
Regarding condition 2, if XQOK is sent while the XWRE pin is high, WA, VWA and RA are all reset (when
GRSCOR is high).
– 144 –
CXD3048R
§4-13-8. Data Readout (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)
When data write starts, there is no valid data in the RAM so the XEMP pin is low. The XWRE pin goes from
high to low, and if there is no sound skipping or other problems with the CRC check at the next SCOR, XQOK
is sent during the GRSCOR high interval which comes within 7ms, and the defined address and valid data are
registered. At this point, the XEMP pin goes high for the first time and readout is enabled. Data readout follows
RA, and is performed in sync with the internally generated Fs system clocks. The readout data and the Fs
system clocks are output from the DATA and the BCK and LRCK pins, respectively.
RA is the address for reading out the written data that has been validated by VWA, and the area from VWA to
RA is the amount of valid data (|VWA – RA|). The upper 5 bits are output as AM21 to AM17. When RA catches
up to VWA and there is no more valid data (|VWA – RA| = 0), the XEMP pin goes low and readout is prohibited.
When this state occurs, the CPU must set the XRDE pin high to prohibit readout. To restart readout, valid data
must be registered as described above. The XEMP pin is held low until valid data is registered.
XWRE
XQOK
XEMP
XRDE
Note) After the XWRE pin goes from high to low, readout is enabled when valid data is registered by
the first XQOK. However, ensuring some difference between VWA and RA is recommended in
consideration of CRC NG, etc.
See also "Application Notes" for the control of the shock-proof memory controller block.
– 145 –
CXD3048R
§4-14. CPU to DRAM Access Function
The CXD3048R can establish a special area in the DRAM. This allows a microcomputer to read and write
optional 16-bit data to a portion of the DRAM area.
This function can be used to store and optionally read out demodulated CD TEXT data, etc.
The range of this special area is set by $A7, and can be selected in 8 steps from 32K to 2M bits.
Table 4-19 shows the addresses which can be specified according to the used DRAM capacity and the special
area setting value.
In addition, the address specification method can be selected from absolute and relative specification.
RSL
1 0
MSL
2 1 0
DRDR19 to DRDR0
specification range
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
— — — — — — —
00000 to 007FF
00000 to 00FFF
00000 to 01FFF
00000 to 03FFF
00000 to 07FFF
00000 to 0FFFF
00000 to 1FFFF
4M setting
0 0
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
— — — — — — —
00000 to 007FF
00000 to 00FFF
00000 to 01FFF
00000 to 03FFF
00000 to 07FFF
00000 to 0FFFF
00000 to 1FFFF
16M setting 1 1
Table 4-19.
– 146 –
CXD3048R
Write and Read by Absolute Address Specification
WRITE
READ
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
Transfer an optical address
with the $A9F command
Transfer an optional address
with the $A9F command
L (Req NG)
L (Req NG)
Check SQSO
(A)
Check SQSO
(1)
H (Req OK)
H (Req OK)
Write optional data with the
$A9E command
(DRWR = 1, DRADR = 1)
Generate a readout request
with $A9E command
(DRWR = 0, DRADR = 1)
(B)
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
Change $A8 command
XSOEO2 from "1" to "0"
L (NG)
END
Check SQSO
(2)
H (Data Ready)
Read 16-bit data from SQSO
and SQCK
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
END
– 147 –
CXD3048R
Write Communication Timing
$A8
$A9F $A9E $A8
Command
XSOEO2
STDO OUT
SQSO
Readout Communication Timing
$A8
$A9F $A9E $A8
Command
XSOEO2
$A8
STDO OUT
SQCK
(1)
(2)
SQSO
D0
D15
Readout Communication Operation
(1) Set STDO OUT to "1" to switch the serial communication line for special memory.
(2) Send the address command ($A9F), then check whether the DRAM related processing has completed
using the SQSO pin.
(3) The data read out from the DRAM is loaded to the communication block inside the LSI by sending the read
command ($A9E) and causing XSOEO2 to fall ($A8). However, the DRAM related processing requires a
check as to whether the data was loaded properly using the SQSO pin.
(4) The readout data is output from the SQSO pin by inputting 16 clocks from the SQCK pin.
– 148 –
CXD3048R
Write and Read by Relative Address Specification
READ
WRITE
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
Write the absolute address
(A) on page 147
Write the absolute address
(B) on page 147
NEXT
PENDING
NEXT
PENDING
Write optional data with the
$A9E command
(DRWR = 1, DRADR = 0)
Generate a readout request
with $A9E command
(DRWR = 0, DRADR = 0)
L (Req NG)
L (Req NG)
Check SQSO
H (Req OK)
Check SQSO
H (Req OK)
N
Change $A8 command
XSOEO2 from "1" to "0"
and set SDTO OUT to "1"
END
Y
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
L (NG)
Check SQSO
H (Data Ready)
Read 16-bit data from SQSO
and SQCK
END
N
END
Y
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
END
– 149 –
CXD3048R
§4-15. Asymmetry Correction
Fig. 4-20 shows the block diagram and circuit example.
ASYE command
R1
ASYO
RFAC
+
–
R1
R1
R1
R2
ASYI
+
–
BIAS
R1
2
5
=
R2
Fig. 4-20. Asymmetry Correction Application Circuit
– 150 –
CXD3048R
§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation
• In order to demodulate the CD TEXT data, set the command $8 Data 6 D3 TXON to "1". While TXON is "1",
the CD TEXT demodulation circuit occupies the EXCK and SBSO pins, so connect EXCK to low and do not
use the data output from SBSO. Also, 26.7ms (max.) are required to demodulate the CD TEXT data correctly
after TXON is set to "1".
• The CD TEXT data is output by switching the SQSO pin with the command. The CD TEXT data output is
enabled by setting the command $8 Data 6 D2 TXOUT to "1". To read data, the readout clock should be input
to SQCK.
• The readable data are the CRC counting results for each pack and the CD TEXT data (16 bytes) except for
CRC data.
• When the CD TEXT data is read, the order of the MSB and LSB is inverted within each byte. As a result,
although the sequence of the bytes is the same, the bits within the bytes are now ordered LSB first.
• Data which can be stored in the LSI is 1 packet (4 packs).
TXON
CD TEXT
Decoder
EXCK
SBSO
Subcode
Decoder
SQCK
SQSO
TXOUT
Fig. 4-21. Block Diagram of CD TEXT Demodulation Circuit
– 151 –
SCOR
SQSO
SQCK
16 Bytes
Pack4
4 bits
CRC
4 bits
0
16 Bytes
Pack1
16 Bytes
Pack2
16 Bytes
Pack3
Subcode Q Data
80 Clocks
CRCF
CRCF
520 Clocks
TXOUT
(command)
CRC Data
ID1 (Pack1)
ID2 (Pack1)
ID3 (Pack1)
LSB
MSB LSB
MSB
LSB
CRC CRC CRC CRC
0
0
0
0
S2 R2 W1 V1 U1 T1 S1 R1 U3 T3 S3 R3 W2 V2 U2 T2 W4 V4 U4 T4 S4
SQSO
SQCK
4
3
2
1
TXOUT
(command)
Fig. 4-22. CD TEXT Data Timing Chart
CXD3048R
[5] Description of Servo Signal Processing System Functions and Commands
§5-1. General Description of Servo Signal Processing System (VDD: Supply voltage)
Focus servo
Sampling rate:
Input range:
Output format:
Other:
88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs)
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD
7-bit PWM
Offset cancel
Focus bias adjustment
Focus search
Gain-down
Defect countermeasure
Auto gain control
Tracking servo
Sampling rate:
Input range:
Output format:
Other:
88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs)
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD
7-bit PWM
Offset cancel
E:F balance adjustment
Track jump
Gain-up
Defect countermeasure
Drive cancel
Auto gain control
Vibration countermeasure
Sled servo
Sampling rate:
Input range:
Output format:
Other:
345Hz (when MCK = 128Fs)
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD
7-bit PWM
Sled move
FOK, MIRR, DFCT signal generation
RF signal sampling rate: 1.4MHz (when MCK = 128Fs)
Input range:
Other:
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD
RF zero level automatic measurement
– 153 –
CXD3048R
§5-2. Digital Servo Block Master Clock (MCK)
The clock with 2/3 frequency of the crystal is supplied to the digital servo block.
XT4D and XT2D are $3F commands, and XT1D is a $3E command. (Default is "0" for each command)
The digital servo block is designed with an MCK frequency of 5.6448MHz (128Fs) as typical.
Mode
XTAI
FSTO
256Fs
256Fs
256Fs
512Fs
512Fs
512Fs
512Fs
XTSL
—
—
0
XT4D
—
—
0
XT2D
XT1D
Frequency division ratio
MCK
256Fs
128Fs
128Fs
512Fs
256Fs
128Fs
128Fs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
384Fs
384Fs
384Fs
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
—
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1/2
1/2
1
0
—
—
—
1
—
—
1
—
1
1/2
1/4
1/4
0
0
0
Fs = 44.1kHz, —: don't care
Table 5-1.
– 154 –
CXD3048R
§5-3. DC Offset Cancel [AVRG (Average) Measurement and Compensation] (See Fig. 5-3.)
The CXD3048R can measure the averages of RFDC, VC, FE and TE and compensate these signals using the
measurement results to control the servo effectively. This AVRG measurement and compensation is necessary
to initialize the CXD3048R, and is able to cancel the DC offset.
AVRG measurement takes the levels applied to the VC, FE, RFDC and TE pins as the digital average values of
256 samples, and then loads these values into each AVRG register.
The AVRG measurement commands are D15 (VCLM), D13 (FLM), D11 (RFLM) and D4 (TCLM) of $38.
Measurement is on when the respective command is set to "1".
AVRG measurement requires approximately 2.9ms to 5.8ms (when MCK = 128Fs) after the command is
received.
The completion of AVRG measurement operation can be monitored by the SENS pin. (See Timing Chart 5-2.)
Monitoring requires that the upper 8 bits of the command register are 38 (h).
XLAT
2.9 to 5.8ms
SENS
(= XAVEBSY)
Max. 1µs
AVRG measurement completed
Timing Chart 5-2.
<Measurement>
VC AVRG: The VC DC offset (VC AVRG) which is the center voltage for the system is measured and used to
compensate the FE, TE and SE signals.
FE AVRG: The FE DC offset (FE AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the FE and FZC signals.
TE AVRG: The TE DC offset (TE AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the TE and SE signals.
RF AVRG: The RF DC offset (RF AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the RFDC signal.
<Compensation>
RFLC:
(RF signal Ð RF AVRG) is input to the RF In register.
"00" is input when the RF signal is lower than RF AVRG.
(TE signal Ð VC AVRG) is input to the TRK In register.
(TE signal Ð TE AVRG) is input to the TRK In register.
(FE signal Ð VC AVRG) is input to the FCS In register.
(FE signal Ð FE AVRG) is input to the FCS In register.
(FE signal Ð FE AVRG) is input to the FZC register.
TCL0:
TCL1:
VCLC:
FLC1:
FLC0:
Two methods of canceling the DC offset are assumed for the CXD3048R. These methods are shown in Figs. 5-
3a and 5-3b.
An example of AVRG measurement and compensation commands is shown below.
$38 08 00 (RF AVRG measurement)
$38 20 00 (FE AVRG measurement)
$38 00 10 (TE AVRG measurement)
$38 14 0A (Compensation on [RFLC, FLC0, FLC1, TLC1]; corresponds to Fig. 5-3a.)
See the description of $38 for these commands.
– 155 –
CXD3048R
§5-4. E:F Balance Adjustment Function (See Fig. 5-3.)
When the disc is rotated with the laser on, and with the FCS (focus) servo on via FCS search, the traverse
waveform appears in the TE signal due to disc eccentricity.
In this condition, the low-frequency component can be extracted from the TE signal using the built-in TRK hold
filter by setting D5 (TBLM) of $38 to "1".
The extracted low-frequency component is loaded into the TRVSC register as a digital value, and the TRVSC
register value is established when TBLM returns to "0".
Next, setting D2 (TLC2) of $38 to "1" compensates the values obtained from the TE and SE input pins with the
TRVSC register value (subtraction), allowing the E:F balance offset to be adjusted. (See Fig. 5-3.)
§5-5. FCS Bias (Focus Bias) Adjustment Function
The FBIAS register value can be added to the FCS servo filter input by setting D14 (FBON) of $3A to "1". (See
Fig. 5-3.)
When D11 = 0 and D10 = 1 is set by $34F, the FBIAS register value can be written using the 9-bit value of D9
to D1 (D9: MSB).
In addition, the RF jitter can be monitored by setting the $8 command SOCT to "1". (See "DSP Block Timing
Chart".)
The FBIAS register can be used as a counter by setting D13 (FBSS) of $3A to "1". The FBIAS register functions
as an up counter when D12 (FBUP) of $3A = 1, and as a down counter when D12 (FBUP) of $3A = 0.
The number of up and down steps can be changed by setting D11 and D10 (FBV1 and FBV0) of $3A.
When using the FBIAS register as a counter, the counter stops when the value set beforehand in FBL9 to
FBL1 of $34 matches the FCSBIAS value. Also, if the upper 8 bits of the command register are $3A at this
time, SENS goes high and the counter stop can be monitored.
Here, assume the FBIAS setting value FB9
A
B
C
to FB1 and the FBIAS LIMIT value FBL9 to
FBL1 are set in status A. For example, if
command registers FBUP = 0, FBV1 = 0,
FBV0 = 0 and FBSS = 1 are set from this
status, down count starts from status A and
approaches the set LIMIT value. When the
LIMIT value is reached and the FBIAS value
matches FBL9 to FBL1, the counter stops
and the SENS pin goes high. Note that the
up/down counter counts at each sampling
cycle of the focus servo filter. The number of
steps by which the count value changes can
be selected from 1, 2, 4 or 8 steps by FBV1
and FBV0. When converted to FE input, 1
step corresponds to 1/512 × VDD/2.
FBIAS setting value (FB9 to FB1)
LIMIT value (FBL9 to FBL1)
SENS value
A: Register mode
B: Counter mode
C: Counter mode (when stopped)
– 156 –
CXD3048R
RFDC from A/D
to RF In register
–
RF AVRG
register
RFLC
SE from A/D
TE from A/D
to SLD In register
to TRK In register
–
–
–
TLC1 · TLD1
TLC2 · TLD2
–
TE AVRG
register
TRVSC
register
TLC1
TLC2
FE from A/D
to FCS In register
–
+
FE AVRG
register
FBIAS
register
FLC1
FLC0
FBON
to FZC register
–
Fig. 5-3a.
RFDC from A/D
to RF In register
–
RF AVRG
register
RFLC
SE from A/D
TE from A/D
to SLD In register
to TRK In register
–
–
TLC0 · TLD0
TLC2 · TLD2
–
–
TLC0
VC AVRG
register
TRVSC
register
TLC2
VCLC
FE from A/D
to FCS In register
–
+
FE AVRG
register
FBIAS
register
FLC0
FBON
to FZC register
–
Fig. 5-3b.
– 157 –
CXD3048R
§5-6. AGCNTL (Automatic Gain Control) Function
The AGCNTL function automatically adjusts the filter internal gain in order to obtain the appropriate servo loop
gain. AGCNTL not only copes with the sensitivity variation of the actuator and photo diode, etc., but also
obtains the optimal gain for each disc.
The AGCNTL command is sent when each servo is turned on. During AGCNTL operation, if the upper 8 bits of
the command register are 38 (h), the completion of AGCNTL operation can be confirmed by monitoring the
SENS pin. (See Timing Chart 5-4 and "Description of SENS Signals".)
Setting D9 and D8 of $38 to "1" sets FCS (focus) and TRK (tracking) respectively to AGCNTL operation.
Note) During AGCNTL operation, each servo filter gain must be normal, and the anti-shock circuit (described
hereafter) must be disabled.
XLAT
Max. 11.4µs
SENS
(= AGOK)
AGCNTL completion
Timing Chart 5-4.
Coefficient K13 changes for AGF (focus AGCNTL) and coefficients K23 and K07 change for AGT (tracking
AGCNTL) due to AGCNTL.
These coefficients change from 01 to 7F (h), and they must also be set within this range when written
externally.
After AGCNTL operation has completed, these coefficient values can be confirmed by reading them out from
the SENS pin with the serial readout function (described hereafter).
AGCNTL related settings
The following settings can be changed with $35, $36 and $37.
FG6 to FG0; AGF convergence gain setting, effective setting range: 00 to 57 (h)
TG6 to TG0; AGT convergence gain setting, effective setting range: 00 to 57 (h)
AGS;
Self-stop on/off
AGJ;
Convergence completion judgment time
Internally generated sine wave amplitude (AGF)
Internally generated sine wave amplitude (AGT)
AGCNTL sensitivity 1 (during rough adjustment)
AGCNTL sensitivity 2 (during fine adjustment)
Rough adjustment on/off
AGGF;
AGGT;
AGV1;
AGV2;
AGHS;
AGHT;
Fine adjustment time
Note) Converging servo loop gain values can be changed with the FG6 to FG0 and TG6 to TG0 setting
values. In addition, these setting values must be within the effective setting range. The default settings
aim for 0dB at 1kHz. However, since convergence values vary according to the characteristics of each
constituent element of the servo loop, FG and TG values should be set as necessary.
– 158 –
CXD3048R
AGCNTL default operation has two stages.
In the first stage, rough adjustment is performed with high sensitivity for a certain period of time (select
256/128ms with AGHT, when MCK = 128Fs), and the AGCNTL coefficient approaches the appropriate value.
The sensitivity at this time can be selected from two types with AGV1.
In the second stage, the AGCNTL coefficient is finely adjusted with relatively low sensitivity to further approach
the appropriate value. The sensitivity for the second stage can be selected from two types with AGV2. In the
second stage of default operation, when the AGCNTL coefficient reaches the appropriate value and stops
changing, the CXD3048R confirms that the AGCNTL coefficient has not changed for a certain period of time
(select 63/31ms with AGHJ, when MCK = 128Fs), and then completes AGCNTL operation. (Self-stop mode)
This self-stop mode can be canceled by setting AGS to "0".
In addition, the first stage is omitted for AGCNTL operation when AGHS is set to "0".
An example of AGCNTL coefficient transitions during AGCNTL operation with various settings is shown in
Fig. 5-5.
Initial value
Slope AGV1
AGCNTL coefficient value
Slope AGV2
Convergence value
AGHT
AGJ
AGCNTL
Start
AGCNTL
completion
SENS
Fig. 5-5.
Note) Fig. 5-5 shows the case where the AGCCNTL coefficient converges from the initial value to a smaller
value.
– 159 –
CXD3048R
§5-7. FCS Servo and FCS Search (Focus Search)
The FCS servo is controlled by the 8-bit serial command $0X. (See Table 5-6.)
Register
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16
name
1 0 — — FOCUS SERVO ON (FOCUS GAIN NORMAL)
1 1 — — FOCUS SERVO ON (FOCUS GAIN DOWN)
0 — 0 — FOCUS SERVO OFF, 0V OUT
FOCUS
CONTROL
0
0 0 0 0
0 — 0 — FOCUS SERVO OFF, FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE OUT
0 — 0 0 FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE DOWN
0 — 0 0 FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE UP
—: don't care
Table 5-6.
FCS Search
FCS search is required in the course of turning on the FCS servo.
Fig. 5-7 shows the signals for sending commands $00 → $02 → $03 and performing only FCS search operation.
Fig. 5-8 shows the signals for sending $08 (FCS on) after that.
$00 $02 $03
$00 $02 $03
$08
0
FCSDRV
FCSDRV
RF
RF
FOK
FOK
FZC comparator level
FE
FE
0
0
FZC
FZC
Fig. 5-7.
Fig. 5-8.
– 160 –
CXD3048R
§5-8. TRK (Tracking) and SLD (Sled) Servo Control
The TRK and SLD servos are controlled by the 8-bit command $2X. (See Table 5-9.)
When the upper 4 bits of the serial data are 2 (h), TZC is output to the SENS pin.
Register
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16
name
0 0 — — TRACKING SERVO OFF
0 1 — — TRACKING SERVO ON
1 0 — — FORWARD TRACK JUMP
1 1 — — REVERSE TRACK JUMP
— — 0 0 SLED SERVO OFF
— — 0 1 SLED SERVO ON
TRACKING
MODE
2
0 0 1 0
— — 1 0 FORWARD SLED MOVE
— — 1 1 REVERSE SLED MOVE
—: don't care
Table 5-9.
TRK Servo
The TRK JUMP (track jump) level can be set with 6 bits (D13 to D8) of $36.
In addition, when the TRK servo is on and D17 of $1 is set to "1", the TRK servo filter switches to gain-up
mode. The filter also switches to gain-up mode when the LOCK signal goes low or when vibration is detected
with the anti-shock circuit (described hereafter) enabled.
The CXD3048R has 2 types of gain-up filter structures in TRK gain-up mode which can be selected by setting
D16 of $1. (See Table 5-17.)
SLD Servo
The SLD MOV (sled move) output, composed of a basic value from 6 bits (D13 to D8) of $37, is determined by
multiplying this value by 1×, 2×, 3×, or 4× set using D17 and D16 when D18 = D19 = 0 is set with $3. (See
Table 5-10.)
SLD MOV must be performed continuously for 50µs or more. In addition, if the LOCK input signal goes low
when the SLD servo is on, the SLD servo turns off.
Note) When the LOCK signal is low, the TRK servo switches to gain-up mode and the SLD servo is turned
off. These operations are disabled by setting D6 (LKSW) of $38 to "1".
Register
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16
name
0 0 0 0 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±1)
0 0 0 1 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±2)
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±3)
0 0 1 1 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±4)
Table 5-10.
– 161 –
CXD3048R
§5-9. MIRR and DFCT Signal Generation
The RF signal obtained from the RFDC pin is sampled at approximately 1.4MHz (when MCK = 128Fs) and
loaded. The MIRR and DFCT signals are generated from this RF signal.
MIRR Signal Generation
The loaded RF signal is applied to peak hold and bottom hold circuits.
An envelope is generated from the waveforms generated in these circuits, and the MIRR comparator level is
generated from the average of this envelope waveform.
The MIRR signal is generated by comparing the waveform generated by subtracting the bottom hold value
from the peak hold value with this MIRR comparator level. (See Fig. 5-11.)
The bottom hold speed and mirror sensitivity can be selected from four values using D7 and D6, and D5 and
D4, respectively, of $3C.
RF
Peak Hold
Bottom Hold
Peak Hold
MIRR Comp
– Bottom Hold
(Mirror comparator level)
H
L
MIRR
Fig. 5-11.
DFCT Signal Generation
The loaded RF signal is input to two peak hold circuits with different time constants, and the DFCT signal is
generated by comparing the difference between these two peak hold waveforms with the DFCT comparator
level. (See Fig. 5-12.)
The DFCT comparator level can be selected from four values using D13 and D12 of $3B.
RF
Peak Hold1
Peak Hold2
Peak Hold2
SDF
– Peak Hold1
(Defect comparator level)
H
L
DFCT
Fig. 5-12.
– 162 –
CXD3048R
§5-10. DFCT Countermeasure Circuit
The DFCT countermeasure circuit maintains the directionality of the servo so that the servo does not become
easily dislocated due to scratches or defects on discs.
Specifically, this operation is achieved by detecting scratches and defects with the DFCT signal generation
circuit, and when DFCT goes high, applying the low-frequency component of the error signal before DFCT
went high to the FCS and TRK servo filter inputs. (See Fig. 5-13.)
In addition, these operations are activated by the default. They can be disabled by setting D7 (DFSW) of $38 to "1".
Hold filter
Error signal
Input register
Hold register EN
DFCT
Servo filter
Fig. 5-13.
§5-11. Anti-shock Circuit
When vibrations occur in the CD player, this circuit forces the TRK filter to switch to gain-up mode so that the
servo does not become easily dislocated. This circuit is for systems which require vibration countermeasures.
Concretely, vibrations are detected using an internal anti-shock filter and comparator circuit, and the gain is
increased. (See Fig. 5-14.)
The comparator level is fixed to 1/16 of the maximum comparator input amplitude. However, the comparator
level is practically variable by adjusting the value of the anti-shock filter output coefficient K35.
This function can be turned on and off by D19 of $1 when the brake circuit (described hereafter) is off. (See
Table 5-17.)
This circuit can also support an external vibration detection circuit, and can set the TRK servo filter to gain-up
mode by inputting high level to the ATSK pin.
When the upper 4 bits of the command register are 1 (h), vibration detection can be monitored from the SENS
pin. It can also be monitored from the ATSK pin by setting $3F command ASOT to "1".
ATSK
Anti-shock
filter
SENS
Comparator
TE
TRK gain-up
filter
TRK
PWM Gen.
TRK gain normal
filter
Fig. 5-14.
– 163 –
CXD3048R
§5-12. Brake Circuit
Immediately after a long distance track jump it tends to be hard for the actuator to settle and for the servo to
turn on.
The brake circuit prevents these phenomenon.
In principle, the brake circuit uses the tracking drive as a brake by cutting the unnecessary portions utilizing
the 180° offset in the RF envelope and tracking error phase relationship which occurs when the actuator
traverses the track in the radial direction from the inner track to the outer track and vice versa. (See Figs. 5-15
and 5-16.)
Concretely, this operation is achieved by masking the tracking drive using the TRKCNCL signal generated by
loading the MIRR signal at the edge of the TZC (Tracking Zero Cross) signal.
The brake circuit can be turned on and off by D18 of $1. (See Table 5-17.)
In addition, the low frequency for the tracking drive after masking can be boosted. (SFBK1 and SFBK2 of
$34B)
Outer track → Inner track
Inner track → Outer track
REV FWD
JMP JMP
FWD REV
JMP JMP
Servo ON
Servo ON
TRK
DRV
TRK
DRV
RF
Trace
RF
Trace
MIRR
MIRR
TE
0
TE
0
TZC
Edge
TZC
Edge
TRKCNCL
TRKCNCL
TRK DRV
0
0
(SFBK OFF)
TRK DRV
0
0
(SFBK OFF)
TRK DRV
(SFBK ON)
TRK DRV
(SFBK ON)
SENS
TZC out
SENS
TZC out
Fig. 5-15.
Fig. 5-16.
Register
name
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16
1 0 — — ANTI SHOCK ON
0 —— — ANTI SHOCK OFF
— 1 — — BRAKE ON
— 0 — — BRAKE OFF
TRACKING
CONTROL
1
0 0 0 1
— — 0 — TRACKING GAIN NORMAL
— — 1 — TRACKING GAIN UP
— —— 1 TRACKING GAIN UP FILTER SELECT 1
— —— 0 TRACKING GAIN UP FILTER SELECT 2
—: don't care
Fig. 5-17.
– 164 –
CXD3048R
§5-13. COUT Signal
The COUT signal is output to count the number of tracks during traverse, etc. It is basically generated by
loading the MIRR signal at both edges of the TZC signal. The used TZC signal can be selected from among
three different phases according to the COUT signal application.
• HPTZC: For 1-track jumps
Fast phase COUT signal generation with a fast phase TZC signal. (The TZC phase is advanced by
a cut-off 1kHz digital HPF; when MCK = 128Fs.)
• STZC: For COUT generation when MIRR is externally input and for applications other than COUT
generation.
This is generated by sampling the TE signal at 700kHz. (when MCK = 128Fs)
• DTZC: For high-speed traverse
Reliable COUT signal generation with a delayed phase STZC signal.
Since it takes some time to generate the MIRR signal, it is necessary to delay the TZC signal in accordance
with the MIRR signal delay during high-speed traverse.
The COUT signal output method is switched with D15 and D14 of $3C.
When D15 = 1:
STZC
When D15 = 0 and D14 = 0: HPTZC
When D15 = 0 and D14 = 1: DTZC
When DTZC is selected, the delay can be selected from two values with D14 of $36.
§5-14. Serial Readout Circuit
The measurement and adjustment results specified beforehand by serial command $39 can be read out from
the SENS pin by inputting the readout clock to the SCLK pin. (See Fig. 5-18, Table 5-19 and "Description of
SENS Signals".)
Specified commands
See the table on page 180.
XLAT
tSPW
t
DLS
· · ·
· · ·
SCLK
1/fSCLK
Serial Readout Data
(SENS pin)
MSB
LSB
Fig. 5-18.
Item
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
16
Unit
MHz
ns
SCLK frequency
SCLK pulse width
Delay time
fSCLK
t
t
SPW
DLS
31.3
15
µs
Table 5-19.
During readout, the upper 8 bits of the command register must be 39 (h).
– 165 –
CXD3048R
§5-15. Writing to Coefficient RAM
The coefficient RAM can be rewritten by $34. All coefficients have default values in the built-in ROM, and
transfer from the ROM to the RAM is completed approximately 40µs (when MCK = 128Fs) after the XRST pin
rises. (The coefficient RAM cannot be rewritten during this period.)
After that, the characteristics of each built-in filter can be finely adjusted by rewriting the data for each address
of the coefficient RAM.
The coefficient rewrite command is comprised of 24 bits, with D14 to D8 of $34 as the address (D15 = 0) and
D7 to D0 as the data. Coefficient rewriting is completed 11.3µs (when MCK = 128Fs) after the command is
received. When rewriting multiple coefficients continuously, be sure to wait 11.3µs (when MCK = 128Fs) before
sending the next rewrite command.
§5-16. PWM Output
FCS, TRK and SLD PWM format outputs are described below.
In particular, FCS and TRK use a double oversampling noise shaper.
Timing Chart 5-20 and Fig. 5-21 show examples of output waveforms and drive circuits.
MCK
(5.6448MHz) ↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
Output value +A
Output value –A
64tMCK
Output value 0
64tMCK
SLD
64tMCK
SFDR
SRDR
AtMCK
AtMCK
FCS/TRK
32tMCK
32tMCK
32tMCK
32tMCK
32tMCK
32tMCK
FFDR/
TFDR
A
2
A
2
t
MCK
tMCK
FRDR/
TRDR
A
2
A
2
t
MCK
tMCK
1
t
MCK =
≈ 180ns
5.6448MHz
Timing Chart 5-20.
VCC
R
R
R
DRV
RDR
FDR
R
V
EE
Fig. 5-21. Drive Circuit
– 166 –
CXD3048R
§5-17. Servo Status Changes Produced by LOCK Signal
When the LOCK signal becomes low, the TRK servo switches to the gain-up mode and the SLD servo turns off
in order to prevent SLD free-running.
Setting D6 (LKSW) of $38 to "1" deactivates this function.
In other words, neither the TRK servo nor the SLD servo change even when the LOCK signal becomes low.
This enables microcomputer control.
§5-18. Description of Commands and Data Sets
$34
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
KA6 KA5 KA4 KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0 KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
When D15 = 0.
KA6 to KA0: Coefficient address
KD7 to KD0: Coefficient data
$348 (preset: $348 000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
0
D6
0
D5
0
D4
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
1
0
0
0
PGFS1PGFS0PFOK1PFOK0
MRS MRT1 MRT0
These commands set the GFS signal hold time. The hold time is inversely proportional to the playback speed.
PGFS1 PGFS0
Processing
0
0
0
1
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when not the correct timing.
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the
correct timing for 2ms or longer.
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the
correct timing for 4ms or longer.
1
1
0
1
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the
correct timing for 8ms or longer.
These commands set the FOK signal hold time. See $3B for the FOK slice level.
These are the values when MCK = 128Fs, and the hold time is inversely proportional to the MCK setting.
PFOK1 PFOK0
Processing
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when lower than
the FOK slice level.
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously
lower than the FOK slice level for 4.35ms or more.
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously
lower than the FOK slice level for 10.16ms or more.
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously
lower than the FOK slice level for 21.77ms or more.
– 167 –
CXD3048R
MRS:
This command switches the time constant for generating the MIRR comparator level of the
MIRR generation circuit.
When "0", the time constant is normal. (default)
When "1", the time constant is longer than normal.
The time during which MIRR = high due to the effects of RFDC signal pulse noise, etc.,
can be suppressed by setting MRS = 1.
MRT1, MRT0:
These commands limit the time while MIRR = high.
MRT1
MRT0 MIRR maximum time [ms]
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No time limit
1.10
2.20
4.00
: preset
$34A (preset: $34A 150)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
A/D COPY EMPH CAT DOUT DOUT DOUT WIN DOUT
D9
D8
b8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
1
0
1
0
SEL
EN
D
EN1 DMUT WOD EN EN2
Processing
Command bit
A/DSEL = 0
A/DSEL = 1
Bit 1 of the channel status data is output as audio data.
Bit 1 of the channel status data is output as other than audio data.
Command bit
COPY EN = 0
COPY EN = 1
Processing
Bit 2 of the channel status data is output as digital copy prohibited.
Bit 2 of the channel status data is output as digital copy enabled.
Command bit
EMPH D = 0
EMPH D = 1
Processing
Bit 3 of the channel status data is output as without pre-emphasis.
Bit 3 of the channel status data is output as with pre-emphasis.
Command bit
CAT b8 = 0
CAT b8 = 1
Processing
Bit 8 of the channel status data is output as "0".
Bit 8 of the channel status data is output as "1".
Command bit
Processing
DOUT EN1 = 0 The DOUT signal, generated from the PCM data read out from the disc, is output.
DOUT EN1 = 1 The DOUT signal, generated from the DA interface input, is output.
– 168 –
CXD3048R
$34A commands cont.
Command bit
Processing
DOUT DMUT = 0 Digital Out output is normally output.
DOUT DMUT = 1 All the audio data portions are output in zero, with Digital Out output as it is.
Command bit
Processing
DOUT WOD = 0 The DOUT sync window is not open.
DOUT WOD = 1 The DOUT sync window is open.
Command bit
Processing
Automatic synchronization to the input LRCK to match the phase with the internal
processing is disabled.
WIN EN = 0
WIN EN = 1
Automatic synchronization to the input LRCK to match the phase with the internal
processing is disabled.
Command bit
Processing
DOUT EN2 = 0 Set to "0" when not generating Digital Out from the DA interface input.
DOUT EN2 = 1 Set to "1" when generating Digital Out from the DA interface input.
DOUT
EN1
DOUT
DMUT
Other mute
conditions
DOUT
Mute
DOUT
Mute F
$B MD2
DOUT output
OFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
—
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
—
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
—
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0dB
The output from the PCM
data read out from a disc.
– ∞dB
The output from the PCM
data read out from a disc.
0dB
1
1
0
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The output from the DA
interface input.
– ∞dB
The output from the DA
interface input.
—: don't care
See "Mute conditions" (1) and (3) to (5) of $AX commands for the other mute conditions.
See $8 commands for DOUT Mute and DOUT Mute F.
– 169 –
CXD3048R
$34B (preset: $34B 000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
0
D8
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
0
D3
0
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
1
0
1
1
SFBK1 SFBK2
LB1SN LB2SNLB2SM
The low frequency can be boosted for brake operation.
See §5-12 for brake operation.
SFBK1: When "1", brake operation is performed by setting the LowBooster-1 input to "0".
This is valid only when TLB1ON = 1. Preset is "0".
SFBK2: When "1", brake operation is performed by setting the LowBooster-2 input to "0".
This is valid only when TLB2ON = 1. Preset is "0".
See the $34C command booster setting for LB1SN, LB2SN and LB2SM.
$34C (preset: $34C 000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
0
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
1
0
0
THBON FHBON TLB1ON FLB1ON TLB2ON
HBST1HBST0 LB1S1 LB1S0 LB2S1 LB2S0
These bits turn on the boost function. (See §5-20. Filter Composition.)
There are five boosters (three for the TRK filter and two for the FCS filter) which can be turned on and off
independently.
THBON: When "1", the high frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".
FHBON: When "1", the high frequency is boosted for the FCS filter. Preset is "0".
TLB1ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".
FLB1ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the FCS filter. Preset is "0".
TLB2ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".
The difference between TLB1ON and TLB2ON is the position where the low frequency is boosted.
For TLB1ON, the low frequency is boosted before the TRK jump, and for TLB2ON, after the TRK jump.
The following commands set the boosters. (See §5-20. Filter Composition.)
HBST1, HBST0: TRK and FCS HighBooster setting.
HighBooster has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22a, and can select three different
combinations of coefficients BK1, BK2 and BK3. (See Table 5-23a.)
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24a.
These characteristics are the same for both the TRK and FCS filters.
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).
LB1S1, LB1S0, LB1SN:
TRK and FCS LowBooster-1 setting.
LowBooster-1 has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22b, and can select six different
combinations of coefficients BK4, BK5 and BK6. (See Table 5-23b.)
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24b.
These characteristics are the same for both the TRK and FCS filters.
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).
LB2S1, LB2S0, LB2SN, LB2SM:
TRK LowBooster-2 setting.
LowBooster-2 has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22c, and can select six different
combinations of coefficients BK7, BK8 and BK9. (See Table 5-23c.)
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24c.
This booster is used exclusively for the TRK filter.
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).
Note) Fs = 44.1kHz
– 170 –
CXD3048R
HighBooster setting
BK2
BK3
HBST0
HBST1
BK1
BK3
Z –1
Z –1
0
1
1
—
0
1
–120/128
–124/128
–126/128
96/128
112/128
120/128
2
2
2
BK1
BK2
—: don't care
Fig. 5-22a.
Table. 5-23a.
LowBooster-1 setting
BK4
BK5
Characteristic
diagram
BK6
LB1S1 LB1S0 LB1SN
1
BK6
Z –1
Z –1
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
1
0
1
1
—
0
1
—
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
–255/256
–511/512
–1023/1024 4095/4096 1/4
–127/128
–255/256
–511/512
1023/1024 1/4
2047/2048 1/4
BK4
BK5
255/256
511/512
1
1
1
Fig. 5-22b.
1023/1024
—: don't care
Table. 5-23b.
LowBooster-2 setting
Characteristic
diagram
BK9
LB2S1 LB2S0 LB2SN LB2SM
1
BK7
BK8
BK9
Z –1
Z –1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
—
0
1
—
0
1
—
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
–255/256
–511/512
–1023/1024
–31/32
1023/1024 1/4
2047/2048 1/4
4095/4096 1/4
BK7
BK8
127/128
255/256
1
1
1
1
1
1
–63/64
Fig. 5-22c.
–127/128
–255/256
–511/512
–1023/1024
511/512
1023/1024
2047/2048
4095/4096
—: don't care
Table. 5-23c.
1
2
1
1
to
to
correspond to
correspond to
1
1
to
to
in Fig. 5-23b respectively.
in Fig. 5-23c respectively.
6
9
6
9
– 171 –
CXD3048R
15
12
9
3
2
1
6
3
0
–3
–6
–9
–12
–15
1
10
100
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
+90
+72
3
2
1
+36
0
–36
–72
–90
1
10
100
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
Fig. 5-24a. Servo HighBooster characteristics [FCS, TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)
1
2
3
HBST1 = 0
HBST1 = 1, HBST0 = 0
– 172 –
HBST1 = 1, HBST0 = 1
CXD3048R
15
12
9
6
5
4
6
3
0
–3
–6
–9
3
2
1
–12
–15
18
1
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency [Hz]
6
5
4
0
–18
–36
–54
3
2
1
–72
–90
1
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency [Hz]
Fig. 5-24b. Servo LowBooster-1 characteristics [FCS, TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)
1
6
1
6
(
to
correspond to
to
in Table 5-23b respectively.)
– 173 –
CXD3048R
15
12
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
6
3
0
–3
–6
–9
3
2
1
–12
–15
18
1
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency [Hz]
0
–18
–36
–54
3
9
2
8
1
7
6
5
4
–72
–90
1
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency [Hz]
Fig. 5-24c. Servo LowBooster-2 characteristics [TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)
1
9
1
9
(
to
correspond to
to
in Table 5-23c respectively.)
– 174 –
CXD3048R
$34E (preset: $34E000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
0
D6
D5
D4
D3
0
D2
0
D1
D0
1
1
1
0
IDFSL3 IDFSL2 IDFSL1 IDFSL0
DFSLS IDFT1 IDFT0
LPDF0 INVRFDC
IDFSL3:
New DFCT detection output setting.
When "0", only the DFCT signal described in §5-9 is detected and output from the DFCT
pin. (default)
When "1", the DFCT signal described in §5-9 and the new DFCT signal are switched and
output from the DFCT pin.
The switching timing is as follows.
When the §5-9 DFCT signal is low, the new DFCT signal is output from the DFCT pin.
When the §5-9 DFCT signal is high, this DFCT signal is output from the DFCT pin.
In addition, the time at which the new DFCT signal can be output after the ¤5-9 DFCT signal
switches to low can also be set. (See IDFT1 and IDFT0 of $34E.)
IDFSL3
§5-9 DFCT
DFCT pin
§5-9 DFCT
0
0
1
1
L
H
L
§5-9 DFCT
New DFCT
§5-9 DFCT
H
IDFSL2:
New DFCT detection time setting.
DFCT = high is held for a certain time after new DFCT detection. This command sets that time.
When "0", a long hold time. (default)
When "1", a short hold time.
IDFSL1:
IDFSL0:
DFSLS:
New DFCT detection sensitivity setting.
When "0", a high detection sensitivity. (default)
When "1", a low detection sensitivity.
New DFCT release sensitivity setting.
When "0", a high release sensitivity. (default)
When "1", a low release sensitivity.
DFCT slice level setting mode switching.
When "0", the two bits of $3B commands SDF2 and SDF1 are used to set the DFCT slice
level as usual. (default)
When "1", the six bits of $3D commands SDF6 to SDF3 and $3B commands SDF2 and
SDF1 are used to set the DFCT slice level.
IDFT1, IDFT0:
These commands set the time at which the new DFCT signal can be output (output
prohibited time) after the §5-9 DFCT signal switches to low.
IDFT1
IDFT0
New DFCT signal output prohibited time
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
204.08µs
294.78µs
408.16µs
612.24µs
: preset
LPDF0:
DFCT signal generation mode switching.
When "0", the rise time constant of the DFCT generation circuit peak hold value is as
usual. (default)
When "1", the rise time constant of the DFCT generation circuit peak hold value is
weighed.
INVRFDC:
RFDC signal polarity inverted input setting.
When "0", the RFDC signal polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)
When "1", the RFDC signal polarity is set to inverted.
– 175 –
CXD3048R
$34F
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
1
1
1
1
0
FBL9 FBL8 FBL7 FBL6 FBL5 FBL4 FBL3 FBL2 FBL1
—
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = D11 = 1 ($34F)
D10 = 0
FBIAS LIMIT register write
FBL9 to FBL1: Data; data compared with FB9 to FB1, FBL9 = MSB.
When using the FBIAS register in counter mode, counter operation stops when the value
of FB9 to FB1 matches with FBL9 to FBL1.
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
—
1
1
1
1
0
1
FB9 FB8 FB7 FB6 FB5 FB4 FB3 FB2 FB1
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = 1 ($34F)
D11 = 0, D10 = 1
FBIAS register write
FB9 to FB1: Data; two's complement data, FB9 = MSB.
For FE input conversion, FB9 to FB1 = 011111111 corresponds to 255/256 × VDD/4
and FB9 to FB1 = 100000000 to –256/256 × VDD/4 respectively. (VDD: supply voltage)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
1
1
1
0
0
TV9 TV8 TV7 TV6 TV5 TV4 TV3 TV2 TV1 TV0
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = 1 ($34F)
D11 = 0, D10 = 0
TRVSC register write
TV9 to TV0: Data; two's complement data, TV9 = MSB.
For TE input conversion, TV9 to TV0 = 0011111111 corresponds to 255/256 × VDD/4
and TV9 to TV0 = 1100000000 to –256/256 × VDD/4 respectively. (VDD: supply voltage)
Notes) • When the TRVSC register is read out, the data length is 9 bits. At this time, data corresponding to
each bit TV8 to TV0 during external write are read out.
• When reading out internally measured values and then writing these values externally, set TV9 the
same as TV8.
– 176 –
CXD3048R
$35 (preset: $35 58 2D)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
FT1 FT0 FS5 FS4 FS3 FS2 FS1 FS0 FTZ FG6 FG5 FG4 FG3 FG2 FG1 FG0
FT1, FT0, FTZ: Focus search-up speed
Default value: 010 (0.673 × VDDV/s)
Focus drive output conversion
FT1
FT0
FTZ
Focus search speed [V/s]
1.35 × VDD
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0.673 × VDD
0.449 × VDD
0.336 × VDD
1.79 × VDD
1.08 × VDD
0.897 × VDD
0.769 × VDD
: preset, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage
FS5 to FS0:
FG6 to FG0:
Focus search limit voltage
Default value: 011000 ((1 ± 24/64) × VDD/2, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage)
Focus drive output conversion
AGF convergence gain setting value
Default value: 0101101
$36 (preset: $36 0E 2E)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TDZC DTZC TJ5 TJ4 TJ3 TJ2 TJ1 TJ0 SFJP TG6 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 TG1 TG0
TDZC:
Selects the TZC signal for generating the TRKCNCL signal during brake circuit operation.
When "0", the edge of the HPTZC or STZC signal, whichever has the faster phase, is used.
When "1", the edge of the HPTZC, STZC signal or the tracking drive signal zero-cross,
whichever has the faster phase, is used. (See §5-12.)
DTZC delay (8.5/4.25µs, when MCK = 128Fs)
DTZC:
Default value: 0 (4.25µs)
TJ5 to TJ0:
Track jump voltage
Default value: 001110 ((1 ± 14/64) × VDD/2, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage)
Tracking drive output conversion
SFJP:
Surf jump mode on/off
The tracking PWM output is generated by adding the tracking filter output and TJReg (TJ5
to TJ0), by setting D7 to "1" (on)
TG6 to TG0:
AGT convergence gain setting value
Default value: 0101110
– 177 –
CXD3048R
$37 (preset: $37 50 BA)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
FZSH FZSL SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 AGS AGJ AGGF AGGT AGV1 AGV2 AGHS AGHT
FZSH, FZSL:
FZC (Focus Zero Cross) slice level
Default value: 01 (1/8 × VDD/2, VDD: supply voltage); FE input conversion
FZSH
FZSL
Slice level
1/4 × VDD/2
1/8 × VDD/2
1/16 × VDD/2
1/32 × VDD/2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
: preset
SM5 to SM0:
Sled move voltage
Default value: 010000 ((1 ± 16/64) × VDD/2, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage)
Sled drive output conversion
AGS:
AGJ:
AGCNTL self-stop on/off
Default value: 1 (on)
AGCNTL convergence completion judgment time during low sensitivity adjustment
(31/63ms, when MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 0 (63ms)
AGGF:
AGGT:
Focus AGCNTL internally generated sine wave amplitude (small/large)
Default value: 1 (large)
Tracking AGCNTL internally generated sine wave amplitude (small/large)
Default value: 1 (large)
FE/TE input conversion
0 (small) 1/32 to VDD/2
AGGF
1 (large) 1/16 to VDD/2
0 (small) 1/16 to VDD/2
AGGT
1 (large) 1/8 to VDD/2
: preset
AGV1:
AGV2:
AGHS:
AGHT:
AGCNTL convergence sensitivity during high sensitivity adjustment; high/low
Default value: 1 (high)
AGCNTL convergence sensitivity during low sensitivity adjustment; high/low
Default value: 0 (low)
AGCNTL high sensitivity adjustment on/off
Default value: 1 (on)
AGCNTL high sensitivity adjustment time (128/256ms, when MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 0 (256ms)
– 178 –
CXD3048R
$38 (preset: $38 00 00)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
VCLM VCLC FLM FLC0 RFLM RFLC AGF AGT DFSW LKSW TBLM TCLM FLC1 TLC2 TLC1 TLC0
DC offset cancel. See §5-3.
VCLM: VC level measurement (on/off)
VCLC: VC level compensation for FCS In register (on/off)
FLM:
Focus zero level measurement (on/off)
FLC0:
Focus zero level compensation for FZC register (on/off)
RFLM: RF zero level measurement (on/off)
RFLC: RF zero level compensation (on/off)
Automatic gain control. See §5-6.
AGF:
AGT:
Focus auto gain adjustment (on/off)
Tracking auto gain adjustment (on/off)
Misoperation prevention circuit
DFSW: Defect disable switch (on/off)
Setting this switch to "1" (on) disables the defect countermeasure circuit.
LKSW: Lock switch (on/off)
Setting this switch to "1" (on) disables the sled free-running prevention circuit.
DC offset cancel. See §5-3.
TBLM: Traverse center measurement (on/off)
TCLM: Tracking zero level measurement (on/off)
FLC1:
TLC2:
TLC1:
TLC0:
Focus zero level compensation for FCS In register (on/off)
Traverse center compensation (on/off)
Tracking zero level compensation (on/off)
VC level compensation for TRK/SLD In register (on/off)
Note) Commands marked with are accepted every 2.9ms. (when MCK = 128Fs)
All commands are on when "1".
– 179 –
CXD3048R
$39 (preset: $390000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
DAC SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0
When $3A command SVDA = 0
DAC:
Serial data readout DAC mode setting.
When "0", serial data cannot be read out. (default)
When "1", serial data can be read out.
These bits select the serial readout data.
SD6 to SD0:
D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
Readout data
length
Readout data
SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Coefficient RAM address
Data RAM address
Coefficient RAM data
Data RAM data
RF AVRG register
RFDC input signal
FCS Bias register
TRVSC register
DFCT count
8 bits
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
RFDC (Bottom)
RFDC (Peak)
1
0
0
1
RFDC (Peak – Bottom)
VC AVRG register
FE AVRG register
TE AVRG register
FE input signal
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
1
1
0
TE input signal
0
1
SE input signal
0
0
VC input signal
—: don't care
Note) When $3A SVDA is changed, select the readout data again.
– 180 –
CXD3048R
When $3A command SVDA = 1
DAC:
This command selects whether to set readout data for the left or right channel.
When "0", right channel readout data is selected. (default)
When "1", left channel readout data is selected.
SD6 to SD0:
These bits select the data to be output from the left or right channel.
D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0
Data RAM address
D9
D8
Readout data
length
Readout data
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data RAM data
16 bits
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
RF AVRG register
RFDC input signal
FCS Bias register
TRVSC register
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
FCS output signal
TRK output signal
VC AVRG register
FE AVRG register
FE (A-B): FCS in Reg
TE (E-F): TRK in Reg
TE AVRG register
FE input signal
1
2
TE input signal
SE input signal
VC input signal
1
2
Right channel preset
Left channel preset
Note) Coefficient RAM data cannot be output from the audio DAC side.
Do not output RFDC (peak, bottom, peak-bottom) or the DFCT count from the audio
DAC side.
When $3A SVDA is changed, select the readout data again.
The DFCT count counts the number of times the DFCT signal rises while $3994 is set.
Readout outputs the DFCT count at that time.
Memory Readout
The following three memories can be readout without waiting the memory access.
• M02 (Sled filter final memory)
• M12 (Focus hold filter final memory)
• M1A (Track hold filter final memory)
– 181 –
CXD3048R
$3A (D15 = 0) (preset: $3A0000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
FBON FBSS FBUP FBV1 FBV0 FIFZC TJD0 FPS1 FPS0 TPS1 TPS0 SVDA SJHD INBK MTI0
FBIAS (focus bias) register operation setting.
FBON:
FBSS
FBUP
FBON
FBSS
FBUP
Processing
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
—
—
0
FBIAS (focus bias) register addition off.
FBIAS (focus bias) register addition on.
FBIAS register acts as a down counter.
FBIAS register acts as an up counter.
1
—: don't care
FBV1, FBV0: FBIAS (focus bias) counter voltage switching.
The number of FCS BIAS count-up/-down steps per cycle is decided by these bits.
The counter changes once for
each sampling cycle of the
focus servo filter. When MCK
is 128Fs, the sampling
frequency is 88.2kHz. When
converted to FE input, 1 step
is approximately 1/29 × VDD/2,
VDD = supply voltage.
FBV1
FBV0
Number of steps per cycle
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8
: preset
FIFZC:
TJDO:
This selects the FZC slice level setting command.
When "0", the FZC slice level is determined by the $37 FZSH and FZSL setting values. (default)
When "1", the FZC slice level is determined by the $3F8 FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 and FIFZA3 to
FIFZA0 setting values.
This allows more detailed setting and the addition of hysteresis compared to the $37 FZSH
and FZSL setting.
This sets the tracking servo filter data RAM to "0" when switched from track jump to servo
on only when SFJP = 1 (during surf jump operation).
FPS1, FPS0: Gain setting when transferring data from the focus filter to the PWM block.
TPS1, TPS0:
Gain setting when transferring data from the tracking filter to the PWM block.
These are effective for increasing the overall gain in order to widen the servo band, etc.
Operation when FPS1, FPS0 (TPS1, TPS0) = 00 is the same as usual (7-bit shift). However,
6dB, 12dB and 18dB can be selected independently for focus and tracking by setting the
relative gain to 0dB when FPS1, FPS0 (TPS1, TPS0) = 00.
FPS1
FPS0
Relative gain
0dB
TPS1
TPS0
Relative gain
0dB
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
+6dB
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
+12dB
+18dB
: preset
SVDA:
This allows the data set by the $39 command to be output through the audio DAC.
When "0", audio is output. (default)
When "1", the data set by the $39 command is output.
SJHD:
INBK:
This holds the tracking filter output at the value when surf jump starts during surf jump.
When INBK = 0 (off), the brake circuit masks the tracking drive signal with the TRKCNCL
signal which is generated by taking the MIRR signal at the TZC edge. When INBK = 1 (on),
the tracking filter input is masked instead of the drive output.
The tracking filter input is masked when the MIRR signal is high by setting MTI0 = 1 (on).
– 182 –
MTI0:
CXD3048R
$3A8 (preset : $3A 80 00)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
0
D6
0
D5
0
D4
0
D3
0
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
1
0
0
0
FPGS1 FPGS0 TPGS1 TPGS0
FPGS1, FPGS0: These increase +6dB, +12dB and +18dB immediately before FCS SRCH.
TPGS1, TPGS0: These increase +6dB, +12dB and +18dB immediately before TRK JMP.
FPGS1 FPGS0
Gain
0dB
TPGS1 TPGS0
Gain
0dB
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
: preset
: preset
$3A9 (preset : $3A 90 00)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
0
D8
D7
D6
0
D5
0
D4
0
D3
0
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
UDFZC
UDFZC:
This detects FZC not depending on the search direction.
When "0", FZC is detected for UP search. (conventional system: default)
When "1", FZC is detected not depending on the search direction.
$3AFF (preset : $3A FF 00)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
1
D8
1
D7
0
D6
0
D5
0
D4
0
D3
D2
D1
0
D0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
SRQ1 SRQ0
SRQ1, SRQ0: These bits select the ASYO output delay time.
SRQ1 SRQ0 ASYO output delay time
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Approx. 0ns
Approx. 5ns
Approx. 10ns
Approx. 15ns
: preset
– 183 –
CXD3048R
$3B (preset: $3B E0 50)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
SFO2 SFO1 SDF2 SDF1 MAX2 MAX1 SFOX BTF D2V2 D2V1 D1V2 D1V1 RINT
SFOX, SFO2, SFO1: FOK slice level
Default value: 011 (28/256 × VDD/2, VDD = supply voltage)
RFDC input conversion
SFOX SFO2 SFO1
Slice level
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16/256 × VDD/2
20/256 × VDD/2
24/256 × VDD/2
28/256 × VDD/2
32/256 × VDD/2
40/256 × VDD/2
48/256 × VDD/2
56/256 × VDD/2
: preset
SDF2, SDF1:
DFCT slice level
Default value: 10 (0.0313 × VDD)
RFDC input conversion
SFO2 SFO1
Slice level
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.0156 × VDD
0.0234 × VDD
0.0313 × VDD
0.0391 × VDD
: preset, VDD: supply voltage
See the $34E command DFSLS and $3D commands SDF6 to SDF3.
MAX2, MAX1:
DFCT maximum time (MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 00 (no timer limit)
MAX2 MAX1 DFCT maximum time
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No timer limit
2.00ms
2.36ms
*
2.72ms
: preset
BTF:
Bottom hold double-speed count-up mode for MIRR signal generation
On/off (default: off)
On when "1".
– 184 –
CXD3048R
D2V2, D2V1:
D1V2, D1V1:
RINT:
Peak hold 2 for DFCT signal generation
Count-down speed setting
Default value: 01 (0.086 × VDD/ms, 44.1kHz)
[V/ms] unit items indicate RFDC input conversion; [kHz] unit items indicate
the operating frequency of the internal counter.
Count-down speed
D2V2
D2V1
[V/ms]
[kHz]
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.0431 × VDD
0.0861 × VDD
0.172 × VDD
0.344 × VDD
22.05
44.1
88.2
176.4
: preset, VDD: supply voltage
Peak hold 1 for DFCT signal generation
Count-down speed setting
Default value: 01 (0.688 × VDD/ms, 352.8kHz)
[V/ms] unit items indicate RFDC input conversion; [kHz] unit items indicate
the operating frequency of the internal counter.
Count-down speed
D1V2
D1V1
[V/ms]
[kHz]
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.344 × VDD
0.688 × VDD
1.38 × VDD
2.75 × VDD
176.4
352.8
705.6
1411.2
: preset, VDD: supply voltage
This initializes the initial-stage registers of the circuits which generate MIRR, DFCT and FOK.
– 185 –
CXD3048R
$3C (preset: $3C 00 80)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
0
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
COSS COTS CETZ CETF COT2 COT1 MOT2
BTS1 BTS0 MRC1 MRC0
COSS, COTS: These select the TZC signal used when generating the COUT signal.
COSS
COTS
TZC
1
0
0
—
0
1
STZC
HPTZC
DTZC
: preset, —: don't care
STZC is the TZC generated by sampling the TE signal at 700kHz. (when MCK = 128Fs)
DTZC is the delayed phase STZC. (The delay time can be selected by D14 of $36.)
HPTZC is the fast phase TZC passed through a HPF with a cut-off frequency of 1kHz.
See §5-13.
CETZ:
CETF:
Normally, the input from the TE pin enters the TRK filter and is used to generate the TZC
signal. However, the input from the CE pin can also be used. This function is for the center
error servo.
When "0", the TZC signal is generated by using the signal input to the TE pin.
When "1", the TZC signal is generated by using the signal input to the CE pin.
When "0", the signal input to the TE pin is input to the TRK servo filter.
When "1", the signal input to the CE pin is input to the TRK servo filter.
These commands output the TZC signal.
COT2, COT1: The COUT signal is replaced by the TZC signal. Concretely, the TZC signal is output from
the COUT pin and the TZC signal is used for auto sequence instead of the COUT signal.
COT2
COT1
COUT pin output
STZC
HPTZC
COUT
1
0
0
—
1
0
: preset, —: don't care
MOT2:
The MIRR signal is replaced by the STZC signal. Concretely, the STZC signal is output from
the MIRR pin and the STZC signal is used for generating the COUT signal instead of the
MIRR signal.
These commands set the MIRR signal generation circuit.
BTS1, BTS0: These set the count-up speed for the bottom hold value of the MIRR generation circuit.
The time per step is approximately 708ns (when MCK = 128Fs). The preset value is BTS1 = 1,
BTS0 = 0 like the CXD2586R. These bits are valid only when BTF of $3B is "0".
MRC1, MRC0: These set the minimum pulse width for masking the MIRR signal of the MIRR generation circuit.
As noted in §5-9, the MIRR signal is generated by comparing the waveform obtained by
subtracting the bottom hold value from the peak hold value with the MIRR comparator
level. Strictly speaking, however, for MIRR to become high, these levels must be compared
continuously for a certain time. These bits set that time.
The preset value is MRC1 = 0, MRC0 = 0 like the CXD2586R.
MRC1 MRC0 Setting time [µs]
BTS1 BTS0 Number of count-up steps per cycle
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
5.669
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8
11.338
22.675
45.351
: preset (when MCK = 128Fs)
– 186 –
CXD3048R
$3D (preset: $3D 00 00)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
0
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
SFID SFSK THID THSK ABEF TLD2 TLD1 TLD0 SDF6 SDF5 SDF4 SDF3
SFID:
SFSK:
THID:
THSK:
SLED servo filter input can be obtained not from SLD in Reg, but from M0D, which is the
TRK filter second-stage output.
When the low frequency component of the tracking error signal obtained from the RF
amplifier is attenuated, the low frequency can be amplified and input to the SLD servo filter.
Only during TRK servo gain up2 operation, coefficient K30 is used instead of K00. Normally,
the DC gain between the TE input pin and M0D changes for TRK filter gain normal and gain
up2, and error occurs in the DC level at M0D. In this case, the DC level of the signal transmitted
to M00 can be kept uniform by adjusting the K30 value even during the above switching.
TRK hold filter input can be obtained not from SLD in Reg, but from M0D, which is the TRK
filter second-stage output.
When signals other than the tracking error signal from the RF amplifier are input to the SE
input pin, the signal transmitted from the TE pin can be obtained as TRK hold filter input.
Only during TRK servo gain up2 operation, coefficient K46 is used instead of K40. Normally,
the DC gain between the TE input pin and M0D changes for TRK filter gain normal and gain
up2, and error occurs in the DC level at M0D. In this case, the DC level of the signal transmitted
to M18 can be kept uniform by adjusting the K46 value even during the above switching.
See "§5-20. Filter Composition" regarding the SFID, SFSK, THID and THSK commands.
The focus error (FE) and tracking error (TE) can be generated internally.
When 0, the FE and TE signal input mode results. Input each error signal through the FE
and TE pins. (default)
ABEF:
When 1, the FE and TE signal generation mode results and the FE and TE signals are
generated internally.
TLD2 to TLD0: These turn on and off SLD filter correction independently of the TRK filter.
See $38 (TLC0 to TLC2) and Fig. 5-3.
Traverse center correction
TLC2
TLD2
TRK filter
OFF
SLD filter
OFF
0
1
—
0
ON
ON
1
ON
OFF
Tracking zero level correction
TLC1
TLD1
TRK filter
OFF
SLD filter
OFF
0
1
—
0
ON
ON
1
ON
OFF
VC level correction
TLC0
TLD0
TRK filter
OFF
SLD filter
OFF
0
1
—
0
ON
ON
1
ON
OFF
: preset, —: don't care
– 187 –
CXD3048R
SDF6 to SDF3: These set the DEFECT slice level when the $34E command DFSLS = 1.
SDF6 to SDF1
111111
111110
111101
:
Slice level
63/256 × VDD/2
62/256 × VDD/2
61/256 × VDD/2
:
000010
000001
000000
2/256 × VDD/2
1/256 × VDD/2
0
: preset
Note) Set SDF2 and SDF1 with the $3B command.
• Input coefficient sign inversion when SFID = 1 and THID = 1
The preset coefficients for the TRK filter are negative for input and positive for output. With this, the CXD3048R
outputs servo drives which have the reversed phase of input errors.
Negative input coefficient
K19
Positive output coefficient
K22
TE
TRK filter
SLD filter
Negative input coefficient
K00
Positive output coefficient
K05
SE
Positive input coefficient
K40
Positive output coefficient
K45
TRK Hold
TRK Hold filter
When SFID = 1, the TRK filter negative input coefficient is applied to the SLD filter, so the SLD input coefficient
(K00) sign must be inverted. (For example, inverting the sign for coefficient K00: E0h results in 20h.)
For the same reason, when THID = 1, the TRK hold input coefficient (K40) sign must be inverted.
Negative input coefficient
K19
Positive output coefficient
K22
TRK filter
M0D
TE
Positive input coefficient
K00
Positive output coefficient
K05
SLD filter
SE
Negative input coefficient
K40
Positive output coefficient
K45
TRK Hold
TRK Hold filter
For TRK servo gain normal
See "§5-20. Filter Composition".
– 188 –
CXD3048R
$3E (preset: $3E 00 00)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
0
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
F1NM F1DM F3NM F3DM T1NM T1UM T3NM T3UM DFIS TLCD
LKIN COIN MDFI MIRI XT1D
F1NM, F1DM:
T1NM, T1UM:
F3NM, F3DM:
Quasi double accuracy setting for FCS servo filter first-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
F1NM: Gain normal
F1DM: Gain down
Quasi double accuracy setting for TRK servo filter first-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
T1NM: Gain normal
T1UM: Gain up
Quasi double accuracy setting for FCS servo filter third-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
Generally, the advance amount of the phase increases by partially setting the FCS servo
third-stage filter which is used as the phase compensation filter to double accuracy.
F3NM: Gain normal
F3DM: Gain down
T3NM, T3UM:
Quasi double accuracy setting for TRK servo filter third-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
Generally, the advance amount of the phase increases by partially setting the TRK servo
third-stage filter which is used as the phase compensation filter to double accuracy.
T3NM: Gain normal
T3UM: Gain up
Note) Filter first- and third-stage quasi double accuracy settings can be set individually.
See "§5-20 Filter Composition" at the end of this specification concerning quasi double accuracy.
DFIS:
FCS hold filter input extraction node selection
0: M05 (Data RAM address 05); default
1: M04 (Data RAM address 04)
TLCD:
LKIN:
COIN:
This command masks the TLC2 command set by D2 of $38 only when FOK is low.
On when "1"; default is "0".
When "0", the internally generated LOCK signal is output to the LOCK pin. (default)
When "1", the LOCK signal can be input from an external source to the LOCK pin.
When "0", the internally generated COUT signal is output to the COUT pin. (default)
When "1", the COUT signal can be input from an external source to the COUT pin.
The MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals can also be input from an external source.
MDFI:
When "0", the MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals are generated internally. (default)
When "1", the MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals can be input from an external source
through the MIRR, DFCT and FOK pins.
MIRI:
When "0", the MIRR signal is generated internally. (default)
When "1", the MIRR signal can be input from an external source through the MIRR pin.
MDFI
MIRI
0
0
0
1
MIRR, DFCT and FOK are all generated internally.
MIRR only is input from an external source.
MIRR, DFCT and FOK are all input from an external source.
: preset, —: don't care
1
—
XT1D:
The input to the servo master clock is used without being frequency-divided by setting
XT1D to "1". This command takes precedence over the XTSL pin, XT2D and XT4D. See
the description of $3F for XT2D and XT4D.
– 189 –
CXD3048R
$3F (preset: $3F 00 10)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
0
D6
D5
D4
1
D3
D2
0
D1
D0
0
AGG4 XT4D XT2D
0
DRR2 DRR1 DRR0
ASFG FTQ
SRO1
AGHF ASOT
AGG4:
This varies the amplitude of the internally generated sine wave using the AGGF and AGGT
commands during AGC.
When AGG4 = 0, the default is used. When AGG4 = 1, the setting is as shown in the table below.
Sine wave amplitude
AGG4 AGGF AGGT
FE input
TE input
See $37 for AGGF and AGGT.
The presets are AGG4 = 0,
AGGF = 1 and AGGT = 1.
conversion
conversion
0
1
—
—
0
1/32 × VDD/2
—
1/16 × VDD/2
—
0
1
—
—
0
—
—
1/16 × VDD/2
1/8 × VDD/2
1
0
1/64 × VDD/2
0
1
1/32 × VDD/2
1/16 × VDD/2
1/8 × VDD/2
1
0
1
1
: preset, —: don't care
XT4D, XT2D:
MCK (digital servo master clock) frequency division ratio setting
This command forcibly sets the frequency division ratio to 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 when MCK is
generated. See the description of $3E for XT1D. Also, see "§5-2. Digital Servo Block
Master Clock (MCK)".
XT1D
XT2D
XT4D
Frequency division ratio
0
1
0
0
0
—
1
0
—
—
1
According to XTSL
1/1
1/2
1/4
0
: preset, —: don't care
DRR2 to DRR0: Partially clears the Data RAM values ("0" write).
The following values are cleared when "1" (on) respectively; default is "0".
DRR2: M08, M09, M0A
DRR1: M00, M01, M02
DRR0: M00, M01, M02 only when LOCK = low
Note) Set DRR1 and DRR0 on for 50µs or more.
When vibration detection is performed during anti-shock circuit operation, the FCS servo
filter is forcibly set to gain normal status.
ASFG:
FTQ:
On when "1"; default is "0".
The slope of the output during focus search is 1/4 the conventional output slope.
On when "1"; default is "0".
– 190 –
CXD3048R
SRO1:
This command is used to continuously externally output various data inside the digital
servo block which have been specified with the $39 command. (However, D15 (DAC) of
$39 must be set to "1".)
Digital output (SOCK, XOLT and SOUT) can be obtained from three specified pins by
setting this command to "1".
SRO1 = 1
SOLK Output from XPCK pin.
XOLT Output from GFS pin.
SOUT Output from XUGF pin.
AGHF:
ASOT:
This halves the frequency of the internally generated sine wave during AGC.
The anti-shock signal, which is internally detected, is output from the ATSK pin.
Output when "1"; default is "0".
Vibration detection when a high signal is output for the anti-shock signal output.
– 191 –
CXD3048R
$3F8 (preset: $3F8800)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
0
0
0
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 FIFZB3 FIFZB2 FIFZB1 FIFZB0 FIFZA3 FIFZA2 FIFZA1 FIFZA0
SYG3 to SYG0: These simultaneously set the focus drive, tracking drive and sled drive output gains. See
the $AF and $CX commands for the spindle drive output gain setting.
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0
GAIN
0 (– ∞dB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0.125 (–18.1dB)
0.250 (–12.0dB)
0.375 (–8.5dB)
0.500 (–6.0dB)
0.625 (–4.1dB)
0.750 (–2.5dB)
0.875 (–1.2dB)
1.000 (0.0dB)
1.125 (+1.0dB)
1.250 (+1.9dB)
1.375 (+2.8dB)
1.500 (+3.5dB)
1.625 (+4.2dB)
1.750 (+4.9dB)
1.875 (+5.5dB)
: preset
FIFZB3 to FIFZB0:
This sets the slice level at which FZC changes from high to low.
FIFZA3 to FIFZA0:
This sets the slice level at which FZC changes from low to high.
The FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 and FIFZA3 to FIFZA0 setting values are valid only when $3A
FIFZC is "1".
Set so that the FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 ≤ FIFZA3 to FIFZA0.
Hysteresis can be added to the slice level by setting FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 < FIFZA3 to FIFZA0.
FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 or FIFZA3 to FIFZA0 setting value
FZC slice level =
× 0.5 × VDD [V]
32
– 192 –
CXD3048R
$3F9 (preset: $3F9000)
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
0
D8
1
D7
0
D6
0
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
0
0
1
FSUD FFSUP
FFS5 FFS4 FFS3 FFS2 FFS1 FFS0
FSUD, FFSUP: These set the focus search type.
The focus search is started by the $47 command.
FSUD FFSUP
Focus search type
The usual focus search is performed.
0
0
0
1
UP search is performed, and the focus servo is turned on at the FZC
falling edge.
Do not set.
When the upper limit value is reached during the focus search, the
focus search stops. After that, when the lower limit value is reached
UP/DOWN search is performed.
1
1
0
1
These limit values should be set with the $35 FS5 to FS0.
When the lower limit value is reached during the focus search, the
focus search stops. After that, when the upper limit value is reached
UP/DOWN search is performed.
These limit values should be set with the $35 FS5 to FS0.
: preset
FFS5 to FFS0: These set the focus search amplitude voltage. Valid only when FSUD = 1.
FFS5 to FFS0 setting values
Focus search amplitude = (1 ±
) × 0.5 × VDD [V]
64
– 193 –
CXD3048R
Description of Data Readout
64
32
16
8
1
SOCK
(5.6448MHz)
...
...
XOLT
(88.2kHz)
MSB
LSB
8-bit data
9-bit data
MSB
MSB
LSB
SOUT
LSB
16-bit data
16-bit register
for serial/parallel
conversion
16-bit register
for latch
SOUT
LSB
LSB
To the 7-segment LED
·
·
·
·
·
·
To the 7-segment LED
MSB
CLK
MSB
SOCK
XOLT
CLK
Data is connected to the 7-segment LED
by 4-bits at a time. This enables Hex
display using four 7-segment LEDs.
SOUT
Serial data input
D/A
Analog
output
To an oscilloscope, etc.
SOCK
XOLT
Clock input
Offset adjustment,
gain adjustment
Latch enable input
Waveforms can be monitored with an oscilloscope using a serial
input-type D/A converter as shown above.
– 194 –
CXD3048R
§5-19. List of Servo Filter Coefficients
<Coefficient Preset Value Table (1)>
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K00
K01
K02
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
K08
K09
K0A
K0B
K0C
K0D
K0E
K0F
E0
81
23
7F
6A
10
14
30
7F
46
81
1C
7F
58
82
7F
SLED INPUT GAIN
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
SLED OUTPUT GAIN
FOCUS INPUT GAIN
SLED AUTO GAIN
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
K17
K18
K19
K1A
K1B
K1C
K1D
K1E
K1F
4E
32
20
30
80
77
80
77
00
F1
7F
3B
81
44
7F
5E
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN
FOCUS AUTO GAIN
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER B
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain LOW PASS FILTER B
Fix
TRACKING INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
K20
K21
K22
K23
K24
K25
K26
K27
K28
K29
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2F
82
44
18
30
7F
46
81
3A
7F
66
82
44
4E
1B
00
00
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING AUTO GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
Fix indicates that normal preset values should be used.
– 195 –
CXD3048R
<Coefficient Preset Value Table (2)>
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K30
K31
K32
K33
K34
K35
K36
K37
K38
K39
K3A
K3B
K3C
K3D
K3E
K3F
80
66
00
7F
6E
20
7F
3B
80
44
7F
77
86
0D
57
00
SLED INPUT GAIN (Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with SFSK = 1.)
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B
Not used
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
K40
K41
K42
K43
K44
K45
K46
04
7F
7F
79
17
6D
00
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
(Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with THSK = 1.)
Not used
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L
K47
K48
K49
K4A
K4B
K4C
K4D
K4E
K4F
00
02
7F
7F
79
17
54
00
00
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
– 196 –
§5-20. Filter Composition
The internal filter composition is shown below.
K
: Coefficient RAM address, M : Data RAM address
FCS Servo Gain Normal fs = 88.2kHz
M1F
M1E
FCS
AUTO Gain
To FCS
Hold
To FCS
Hold
K0F
M04
K0F
M05
FCS
DFCT
Hold Reg2
M03
Z –1
2–1
M06
Z –1
M07
K06
K06
K11
K13
FCS
In Reg
Z –1
K09
Z –1
AGFON
Sin ROM
K08
K0A
K0B
K0C
K0D
K0E
K10
2 –7
2 –7
27
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K0B and K0D coefficients to "0".
FCS Servo Gain Down fs = 88.2kHz
M1F
M1E
FSC
AUTO Gain
To FCS
Hold
To FCS
Hold
K2B
M04
K2B
M05
FCS
DFCT
Hold Reg2
2–1
M06
Z –1
M07
M03
Z –1
K2D
K13
K06
FCS
In Reg
Z –1
K25
Z –1
K28
K29
K2A
K2C
K24
K26
K27
2–7
2 –7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K27 and K29 coefficients to "0".
FPGS1, 0
FPS1, 0
BK3
BK6
PWM
Z –1
Z –1
BK2
Z –1
Z –1
FCS SRCH
BK5
BK1
BK4
TRK Servo Gain Normal fs = 88.2kHz
TRK
AUTO Gain
To SLD Servo,
TRK Hold
TRK
Hold Reg
DFCT
2–1
M0B
M0C
Z –1
M0D
Z –1
M0E
Z –1
M0F
K19
K22
K23
TRK
In Reg
Z –1
AGTON
Sin ROM
K1B
K1C
K1A
K1E
K1F
K19
K20
K21
2 –7
2 –7
K1D
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1D and K1F coefficients to "0".
TRK Servo Gain Up1 fs = 88.2kHz
TRK
AUTO Gain
TRK
Hold Reg
DFCT
27
M0B
M0C
Z –1
K1B
M0E
Z –1
K3D
M0F
2 –1
K19
K23
K3E
TRK
In Reg
Z –1
K1A
K3C
TRK Servo Gain Up2 fs = 88.2kHz
TRK
AUTO Gain
TRK
Hold Reg
DFCT
2–1
M0E
Z –1
M0F
M0B
Z –1
M0C
Z –1
M0D
Z –1
K19
K3E
K23
TRK
In Reg
K37
K38
K3A
K3C
K3D
K36
2 –7
2 –7
K39
K3B
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K39 and K3B coefficients to "0".
TPS1, 0
TPGS1, 0
BK6
BK3
PWM
BK9
Z–1
Z–1
Z –1
Z–1
BK5
Z –1
BK7
Z –1
BK8
TRK JMP
BK1
BK2
BK4
FCS Servo Gain Normal; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EAXX0)
M1F
M1E
FCS
AUTO Gain
To FCS
Hold
To FCS
Hold
K0F
M05
K0F
M04
FCS
Hold Reg 2
DFCT
2–1
M06
Z –1
M07
M03
Z –1
K13
K06
K06
K11
FCS
In Reg
Z –1
Z –1
AGFON
Sin ROM
K0A
K0B
7FH
K09
K0C
K0D
81H
K08
80H
K0E
K10
2–7
2–7
2 –7
2
2–7
27
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K0B and K0D coefficients during normal operation, and of the K0B, K09 and K0E coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
FCS Servo Gain Down; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3E5XX0)
M1F
M1E
FCS
AUTO Gain
To FCS
Hold
To FCS
Hold
K2B
M04
K2B
M05
FCS
Hold Reg 2
DFCT
2 –1
M03
Z –1
M06
Z –1
M07
K06
K13
K2D
FCS
In Reg
Z –1
Z –1
K26
K27
K28
K29
80H
K2A
K2C
81H
K24
7FH
K25
2 –7
2–7
2 –7
2 –7
2–7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K27 and K29 coefficients during normal operation, and of the K24, K25 and K2A coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
81H, 7FH and 80H are each Hex display 8-bit fixed values
when set to quasi double accuracy.
FPS1, 0
FPGS1, 0
BK3
BK6
PWM
Z –1
Z –1
Z –1
Z –1
FCS SRCH
BK1
BK2
BK4
BK5
TRK Servo Gain Normal; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EXAX0)
TRK
AUTO Gain
TRK
Hold Reg
DFCT
M0B
Z –1
M0C
Z–1
M0D
Z –1
M0E
Z –1
M0F
2–1
K22
K23
K19
K19
TRK
In Reg
AGTON
Sin ROM
81H
K1A
7FH
K1C
K1D
K1E
K1F
80H
K21
2 –7
2 –7
2 –7
2 –7
2 –7
K1B
K20
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1D and K1F coefficirnts during normal operation, and of the K1A, K1B and K20 coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
TRK Servo Gain Up1; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EX5X0)
TRK
AUTO Gain
TRK
DFCT
Hold Reg
27
M0B
Z –1
M0C
Z –1
M0E
Z –1
M0F
2–1
K19
K3E
K23
TRK
In Reg
81H
K1A
7FH
80H
K3C
K3D
2 –7
2–7
2 –7
K1B
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1A, K1B and K3C coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
TRK Servo Gain Up2; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EX5X0)
TRK
AUTO Gain
TRK
DFCT
Hold Reg
M0B
Z –1
M0C
Z –1
M0D
Z –1
M0E
Z –1
M0F
2–1
K19
K3E
K23
TRK
In Reg
K3A
K3B
80H
81H
K36
7FH
K38
K39
K3D
2–7
2 –7
2 –7
2 –7
2–7
K37
K3C
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K39 and K3B coefficients during normal operation, and of the K36, K37 and K3C coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
81H, 7FH and 80H are each Hex display 8-bit fixed values
when set to quasi double accuracy.
TPS1, 0
TPGS1, 0
BK3
BK6
BK9
PWM
Z –1
BK2
Z –1
Z –1
Z –1
BK5
Z –1
Z –1
BK8
TRK JMP
BK1
BK4
BK7
CXD3048R
SLD Servo fs = 345Hz
TRK SERVO FILTER
Secont-stage output
TRK
K30
K00
SFSK (only when TGup2 is used.)
M00
AUTO Gain
M0D
SFID
27
M01
Z –1
M02
K05
K07
2–1
PWM
SLD
In Reg
Z –1
SLD MOV
K03
K04
K01
2–7
2–7
K02
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K02 and K04 coefficients to "0".
HPTZC/Auto Gain fs = 88.2kHz
2–1
FCS
In Reg
Slice
TZC Reg
AGFON
2–1
M08
Z –1
M09
Z –1
M0A
Z –1
AUTO Gain
Reg
Slice
TRK
In Reg
AGTON
AGFON
Sin ROM
K15
K14
K17
– 201 –
CXD3048R
Anti Shock fs = 88.2kHz
2–1
M08
Z –1
M09
Z –1
M0A
Z –1
TRK
In Reg
Anti Shock
Reg
K35
K12
Comp
K31
K16
K33
K34
2 –7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K34 coefficient to "0".
The comparator level is 1/16 the maximum amplitude of the comparator input.
AVRG fs = 88.2kHz
2–1
2 –7
M08
Z –1
VC, TE, FE,
RFDC
AVRG Reg
TRK Hold fs = 345Hz
TRK SERVO FILTER
Second-stage output
K46
THSK (only when TGup2 is used.)
M18
M0D
THID
M19
Z –1
TRK
Hold Reg
K45
2 –1
K40
SLD
In Reg
Z –1
K41
K43
K44
2 –7
2 –7
K42
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K42 and K44 coefficients to "0".
FCS Hold fs = 345Hz
FCS SERVO FILTER
First-stage output
M1F
M1E
K2B when using the
FCS Gain Down filter
K2B
DFIS
($3E)
M04
M10
Z–1
M11
Z–1
M12
FCS
Hold Reg 2
K4D
K48
K0F
M05
FCS SERVO FILTER
Second-stage output
K49
K4B
K4C
2–7
2–7
K4A
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K4A and K4C coefficients to "0".
– 202 –
CXD3048R
§5-21. TRACKING and FOCUS Frequency Response
Tracking frequency response
40
30
20
10
0
180˚
90˚
NORMAL
GAIN UP
G
0˚
φ
–90˚
–10
–180˚
20k
2.1
10
100
1k
f – Frequency [Hz]
When using the preset coefficients with the boost function off.
Focus frequency response
40
180˚
NORMAL
GAIN DOWN
30
20
10
0
90˚
0˚
G
φ
–90˚
–180˚
–10
2.1
10
100
1k
20k
f – Frequency [Hz]
When using the preset coefficients with the boost function off.
– 203 –
[6] Application Circuit
TD
FD
VCC
GND
RFO
FZC
FE
90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
V
SS1
91
92
SE
FE
VC
TE
TEST
TES1
CE
93
VC
AVDD
2
94
V
SS2
AOUT2
VREFR
95
FRDR
FFDR
TRDR
TFDR
SRDR
SFDR
SSTP
MDS
96
AVSS
AVSS
2
1
97
Vcc
98
Driver setting
SSTP
SLED
SPDL
GND
VREFL
AOUT1
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
AVDD
1
XVSS
XTAO
XTAI
MDS
C176
MDP
C176
XVDD
HVDD
HPR
V
DD2
CXD3048R
LRCK
LRCKI
PCMD
PCMDI
BCK
BCKI
DVDD
A3
HPL
HVSS
XTSL
EXCK
SBSO
XWIH
XEMP
SQSO
SCLK
SQCK
SBSO
A2
A1
A0
V
CC
SS
A10
V
V
SS0
A11
XRAS
XCAS
R4M
R4M
TEST3
TEST4
XWRE
XWE
XOE
A11 to A0
D3 to D0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
4M DRAM or 16M DRAM
Application circuits shown are typical examples illustrating the operation of the devices. Sony cannot
assume responsibility for any problems arising out of the use of these circuits or for any infringement of
third party patent and other right due to same.
CXD3048R
Package Outline
Unit: mm
120PIN LQFP (PLASTIC)
18.0 ± 0.2
16.0 ± 0.1
1.7 MAX
SCT A'ssy
1.4 ± 0.1
S
90
61
0.1
S
91
60
B
A
120
31
1
30
M
0.5
0.22 ± 0.05
0.1
S
0.1 ± 0.05
0.22 ± 0.05
(0.2)
0.25
0˚ to 10˚
DETAIL
A
DETAIL
B
PACKAGE STRUCTURE
LEAD PLATING SPECIFICATIONS
EPOXY RESIN
PACKAGE MATERIAL
LEAD TREATMENT
LEAD MATERIAL
ITEM
SPEC.
COPPER ALLOY
Sn-Bi Bi:1-4wt%
5-18µm
SOLDER PLATING
SONY CODE
EIAJ CODE
LQFP-120P-L01
LEAD MATERIAL
LQFP120-P-1616
COPPER ALLOY
0.8g
SOLDER COMPOSITION
PLATING THICKNESS
JEDEC CODE
PACKAGE MASS
120PIN LQFP (PLASTIC)
18.0 ± 0.2
16.0 ± 0.1
1.7MAX
1.4 ± 0.1
Renesas A'ssy
90
61
91
60
B
A
120
31
1
30
0.5
0.10
S
b
0.10
M
S
0.25
0.1 ± 0.05
S
b=0.22 ± 0.05
(0.2)
0˚ to 10˚
DETAIL B
PACKAGE STRUCTURE
LEAD PLATING SPECIFICATIONS
DETAIL A
PACKAGE MATERIAL
LEAD TREATMENT
LEAD MATERIAL
EPOXY RESIN
ITEM
SPEC.
COPPER ALLOY
Sn-Bi Bi:1-4wt%
5-18µm
SONY CODE
EIAJ CODE
LQFP-120P-L051
P-LQFP120-16x16-0.5
SOLDER
LEAD MATERIAL
COPPER ALLOY
0.8g
SOLDER COMPOSITION
PLATING THICKNESS
JEDEC CODE
PACKAGE MASS
Sony Corporation
– 205 –
相关型号:
SI9130DB
5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous ConvertersWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135LG-T1
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135LG-T1-E3
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135_11
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9136_11
Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130CG-T1-E3
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130LG-T1-E3
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130_11
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137DB
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137LG
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9122E
500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification DriversWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明